GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Open CNC
Basic Operation Package 1
Operator's Manual
B- 62994EN/02
Febuary 1999
Warnings and notices for
this publication
GFLE-003
Warning
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various
matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done,
or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this
manual should be regarded as “impossible”.
Notice
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have
been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or
variations in hardware or software, nor to provide every contingency in connection with
installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in
all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to
holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with
respect to, and assumes no responsibility for accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of
the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall
apply.
The following are Registered Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation
CIMPLICITY®
Genius®
The following are Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation
Alarm Master
CIMSTAR
Field Control
Genet
Helpmate
LogicMaster
Modelmaster
PowerMotion
ProLoop
PROMACRO
Series Five
Series 90
Series One
Series Six
Series Three
VuMaster
Workmaster
© Copyright 1998 FANUC Ltd.
Authorized Reproduction GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.
All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to
the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and Cautions according to their
bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as Notes. Read the
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there
is a danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being
damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
Notes is used to indicate supplementary information other than
Warnings and Cautions.
¡ Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-62994EN/02
General Warnings and Cautions
WARNING
1.
Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the
operation of the machine. Before starting a production run, ensure
that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run
using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine
lock function, or by operating the machine with neither a tool nor
workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the
machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly,
possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself,
or injury to the user.
2.
Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in
the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to
the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
3.
Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended
operation.
Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum
allowable feedrate.
The appropriate feedrate varies with the
intended operation.
Refer to the manual provided with the
machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate.
If a
machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.
4.
When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the
direction and amount of compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in
the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to
the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
5.
The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually,
there is no need to change them. When, however, there is no
alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure that you fully
understand the function of the parameter before making any
change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece
and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
s-2
B-62994EN/02
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
1. The operator's manual for Basic Operation Package 1 describes all
the basic functions of the CNC unit, including the optional
functions. The selected optional functions vary with the machine.
Some functions described in the manual may not, therefore, be
supported by your machine.
Check the machine specifications
before using Basic Operation Package 1.
2. Some machine operations and screen functions are implemented
by the machine tool builder. For an explanation of their usage and
related notes, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool
builder.
For example:
l On some machines, executing a tool function causes the tool
change unit to operate. When executing a tool function on such
a machine, stand well clear of the tool change unit. Otherwise,
there is a danger of injury to the operator.
l Many auxiliary functions trigger physical operations, such as
rotation of the spindle. Before attempting to use an auxiliary
function, therefore, ensure that you are fully aware of the
operation to be triggered by that function.
NOTE
l Command programs, parameters, and variables are stored in
nonvolatile memory in the CNC. Generally, the contents of memory
are not lost by a power on/off operation. However, the contents of
memory may be erased by mistake, or important data in nonvolatile
memory may have to be erased upon recovering from a failure.
To enable the restoration of data as soon as possible if such a
situation arises, always make a backup of the data in advance.
s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-62994EN/02
Warnings and Cautions Relating to Basic
Operation Package 1
Warnings and cautions relating to Basic Operation Package 1 are explained in
this manual.
Before using the function, read this manual thoroughly to
become familiar with the provided Warnings, Cautions, and Notes.
On the next page, the points to be noted when Basic Operation Package 1 is
used are summarized. These points are not explained in Chapter 1 and the
subsequent chapters of this manual. Read this part before attempting to use
the function.
s-4
B-62994EN/02
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Important Notice
The following summarizes the points to be noted when Basic Operation
Package 1 is used. Before attempting to use Basic Operation Package 1, read
the following:
CAUTION
l This manual does not explain in detail those operations and
parameters that vary from one CNC model to another and which vary
with options. For an explanation of such operations and parameters,
refer to the relevant CNC manual and the manual supplied by the
machine tool builder.
l This manual describes as many reasonable variations in usage as
possible. It cannot address every combination of features, options,
and commands that should not be attempted.
If a particular
combination of operations is not described, it should not be
attempted.
s-5
CONTENTS
B-62994EN/02
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ......................................................................................................................... s-1
General Warnings and Cautions
Warnings and Cautions Relating to Basic Operation Package 1
Important Notice
PREFACE ...............................................................................................................................................................p-1
Basic Operation Package 1 Features and Restrictions
Contents of the Product Package
Organization of This Manual
Notation Conventions
CONTENTS........................................................................................................................................................... c-1
1. SETUP................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Operating Environment .......................................................................................................................... 2
Installing Basic Operation Package 1 .................................................................................................. 4
Uninstalling Basic Operation Package 1 ............................................................................................. 7
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE .......................................................................................................................... 9
2.1
Starting and Terminating Basic Operation Package 1 ..................................................................... 10
2.1.1
Starting Basic Operation Package 1............................................................................................... 10
2.1.2
2.2
2.3
Terminating Basic Operation Package 1........................................................................................ 11
Window Names and Functions ........................................................................................................... 13
Selecting and Positioning Windows................................................................................................... 21
2.3.1
Selecting a window ........................................................................................................................ 21
2.3.2
2.4
2.5
Positioning a window..................................................................................................................... 22
Selecting a Path ..................................................................................................................................... 24
Displaying Version Information ......................................................................................................... 25
3. SETTING THE PARAMETERS REQUIRED
TO USE BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1...................................................................... 26
3.1
3.2
Setting the CNC Parameters ................................................................................................................ 27
Specifying a Node ................................................................................................................................. 29
4. POSITION DISPLAY............................................................................................................................ 30
4.1
4.2
Overall Position Display ...................................................................................................................... 31
Displaying the Relative Position ........................................................................................................ 33
4.2.1
Resetting relative coordinates ........................................................................................................ 35
4.2.2
Presetting relative coordinates ....................................................................................................... 36
c-1
CONTENTS
4.2.3
B-62994EN/02
Setting the machine position to the floating reference position...................................................... 38
4.2.4
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Presetting the workpiece coordinate system................................................................................... 39
Displaying the Absolute Position ....................................................................................................... 42
Displaying the Machine Position ........................................................................................................ 44
Displaying the Distance to Go ............................................................................................................ 45
Displaying the Amount of Handle Interruption ................................................................................ 46
4.6.1
4.7
4.8
Canceling the amount of handle interruption ................................................................................. 47
Displaying the Operating Monitor...................................................................................................... 49
Displaying the Machining Time and Machined Parts Count ......................................................... 50
5. NC PROGRAM .......................................................................................................................................... 52
5.1
Editing a NC Program .......................................................................................................................... 53
5.1.1
Getting a program from the NC ..................................................................................................... 56
5.1.2
Writing a NC program back to the NC .......................................................................................... 58
5.1.3
Inserting a NC program from a disk............................................................................................... 59
5.1.4
Writing a NC program to a disk..................................................................................................... 60
5.1.5
Finding a character string in a NC program ................................................................................... 61
5.1.6
Replacing a character string in a NC program ............................................................................... 62
5.1.7
Selecting character strings in a NC program.................................................................................. 63
5.1.8
Cutting character strings from a NC program ................................................................................ 64
5.1.9
Copying character strings from a NC program .............................................................................. 66
5.1.10 Pasting character strings into a NC program.................................................................................. 67
5.1.11 Inserting sequence numbers into a NC program ............................................................................ 68
5.1.12 Entering a coordinate value into a NC program............................................................................. 71
5.1.13 Displaying the top of a NC program .............................................................................................. 73
5.1.14 Displaying the end of a NC program.............................................................................................. 74
5.2
5.1.15 Stamping the machining time......................................................................................................... 75
Editing an MDI Program...................................................................................................................... 77
5.2.1
Finding a character string in an MDI program............................................................................... 79
5.2.2
Replacing a character string in an MDI program ........................................................................... 80
5.2.3
Selecting character strings in an MDI program.............................................................................. 81
5.2.4
Cutting character strings from an MDI program ............................................................................ 82
5.2.5
Copying character strings from an MDI program .......................................................................... 84
5.2.6
Pasting character strings into an MDI program.............................................................................. 85
5.2.7
Inserting sequence numbers into an MDI program ........................................................................ 86
5.2.8
Displaying the top of an MDI program .......................................................................................... 88
5.2.9
5.3
Displaying the end of an MDI program ......................................................................................... 89
Displaying the NC Program Directory............................................................................................... 90
5.3.1
Copying a NC program .................................................................................................................. 92
5.3.2
Deleting a NC program .................................................................................................................. 94
5.3.3
Selecting a NC program to be executed ......................................................................................... 95
5.3.4
Changing a NC program comment................................................................................................. 97
5.3.5
Changing the NC program directory contents................................................................................ 98
c-2
CONTENTS
B-62994EN/02
5.4
Checking the Program Currently Being Executed ......................................................................... 100
5.4.1
Rewinding the tape to the beginning of the NC program ............................................................. 101
5.4.2
5.5
5.6
Searching for a sequence number................................................................................................. 103
Displaying the Current and Next Blocks of the NC Program Being Executed ......................... 105
Restarting a NC Program ................................................................................................................... 106
5.6.1
Setting the axis order of movement to the program restart position............................................. 108
5.6.2
5.7
5.8
Searching for a sequence/block number....................................................................................... 109
Displaying the Machining Times...................................................................................................... 112
Displaying the B-Axis Operating Status.......................................................................................... 114
6. SETTING ...................................................................................................................................................... 116
6.1
6.2
6.3
Setting Data.......................................................................................................................................... 117
Operating Time, Parts Count, and Timer Settings ......................................................................... 121
Tool Offset Settings ............................................................................................................................ 124
6.3.1
Entering a relative coordinate value as the tool offset data.......................................................... 127
6.3.2
Entering a measured value as the tool offset data ........................................................................ 129
6.3.3
6.4
Clearing all tool offset data.......................................................................................................... 130
Custom Macro Variable Settings ...................................................................................................... 132
6.4.1
Displaying local variables ............................................................................................................ 134
6.4.2
Common variable 1 settings......................................................................................................... 136
6.4.3
Common variable 2 settings......................................................................................................... 137
6.4.4
Entering a relative coordinate value as a macro variable ............................................................. 139
6.4.5
Clearing all custom macro variables ............................................................................................ 140
6.4.6
6.5
Setting a blank in a macro variable .............................................................................................. 142
Workpiece Origin Offset Settings .................................................................................................... 143
6.5.1
6.6
Entering a measured value as workpiece origin offset data.......................................................... 145
Tool Life Management Data Settings .............................................................................................. 147
6.6.1
Adding a tool to a tool group included in the tool life management data..................................... 151
6.6.2
Changing the life status of a tool included in the tool life management data
(for machining center systems) .................................................................................................... 154
6.6.3
Changing the life status of a tool included in the tool life management data
(for lathe systems)........................................................................................................................ 157
6.6.4
Setting the life counter data included in the tool life management data
(for machining center systems) .................................................................................................... 159
6.6.5
Setting the life counter data included in the tool life management data (for lathe systems)......... 161
6.6.6
Deleting a tool from a tool group included in the tool life management data
(for machining center systems) .................................................................................................... 163
6.6.7
Deleting a tool from a tool group included in the tool life management data
(for lathe systems)........................................................................................................................ 165
6.7
6.8
6.9
Software Operator's Panel Settings .................................................................................................. 167
Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Settings ................................................................................. 169
P-Code Macro Variable Settings ...................................................................................................... 172
6.9.1
Displaying local variables ............................................................................................................ 174
6.9.2
Common variable 1 settings......................................................................................................... 175
c-3
CONTENTS
B-62994EN/02
6.9.3
Common variable 2 settings......................................................................................................... 176
6.9.4
P-code variable 1 settings ............................................................................................................ 177
6.9.5
P-code variable 2 settings ............................................................................................................ 178
6.9.6
Setting a blank in a P-code macro variable .................................................................................. 179
6.10 Chopping Data Settings ..................................................................................................................... 180
6.11 Chuck and Tailstock Barrier Settings .............................................................................................. 182
6.12 B-Axis Tool Offset Settings .............................................................................................................. 186
6.13 Tool Post Interference Check Settings............................................................................................. 189
6.14 2-Path Interference Check Settings .................................................................................................. 192
7. SYSTEM........................................................................................................................................................ 195
7.1
7.2
7.3
Setting Parameters .............................................................................................................................. 196
Displaying the Diagnosis Screen ...................................................................................................... 198
Displaying the System Configuration .............................................................................................. 200
7.3.1
7.4
Outputting the system configuration data to a file........................................................................ 201
Data Input/Output ............................................................................................................................... 203
7.4.1
Setting parameters for input/output.............................................................................................. 204
7.4.2
Displaying lists of various data files ............................................................................................ 208
7.4.3
Entering different types of data.................................................................................................... 210
7.4.4
Outputting different types of data ................................................................................................ 220
7.4.5
Deleting data files ........................................................................................................................ 229
7.4.6
Renaming different types of data files.......................................................................................... 231
Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data........................................................................................... 233
7.5
7.6 Setting Servo Setting Data ................................................................................................................. 235
7.7 Setting Servo Tuning Data ................................................................................................................ 237
7.8 Setting Spindle Setting Data ............................................................................................................. 239
7.9 Setting Spindle Tuning Data ............................................................................................................. 241
7.10 Collecting Waveform Diagnosis Data ............................................................................................. 243
7.10.1 Setting data for waveform diagnosis ............................................................................................ 245
7.10.2 Collecting waveform diagnosis sampling data ............................................................................. 250
7.11 Displaying Waveform Diagnosis Graphs ........................................................................................ 252
7.11.1 Selecting the waveform diagnosis data to be displayed ............................................................... 257
7.11.2 Saving waveform diagnosis data into a file.................................................................................. 259
7.12 Displaying the PMC Status Screen .................................................................................................. 260
7.13 Displaying the PMC Alarm Screen .................................................................................................. 262
7.14 Setting the PMC Counter ................................................................................................................... 263
7.15 Setting the PMC Timer ...................................................................................................................... 265
7.16 Setting the PMC Keep Relay ............................................................................................................ 267
7.17 Setting PMC Data ............................................................................................................................... 269
7.17.1 Setting the data table of PMC data............................................................................................... 271
7.17.2 Setting the group data of PMC data ............................................................................................. 273
7.17.3 Deleting and initializing all PMC data......................................................................................... 278
7.18 Displaying the Operation History ..................................................................................................... 280
7.18.1 Clearing the operation history information .................................................................................. 282
c-4
CONTENTS
B-62994EN/02
7.18.2 Setting I/O signals for the operation history................................................................................. 284
8. MESSAGES ................................................................................................................................................ 286
8.1
8.2
8.3
Displaying Alarm Messages .............................................................................................................. 287
Displaying Operator Messages ......................................................................................................... 288
Displaying the Alarm Message History ........................................................................................... 289
8.3.1
Deleting the entire alarm message history.................................................................................... 290
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION) ........................................................ 292
9.1
Setting Tools for Machining-in-Progress Drawing ........................................................................ 293
9.1.1
Registering tools for machining-in-progress drawing .................................................................. 294
9.1.2
Modifying tool data for machining-in-progress drawing.............................................................. 296
9.1.3
Deleting tools for machining-in-progress drawing....................................................................... 297
9.1.4
Saving tool data for machining-in-progress drawing into a file ................................................... 299
9.1.5
9.2
Reading tool data for machining-in-progress drawing from a file................................................ 300
Performing Machining-in-Progress Drawing .................................................................................. 302
9.2.1
Settings for machining-in-progress drawing ................................................................................ 303
9.2.2
Starting machining-in-progress drawing ...................................................................................... 310
10. CUSTOM ...................................................................................................................................................... 313
10.1 Displaying the OLE Object Screen .................................................................................................. 314
10.1.1 Example for inserting an OLE object........................................................................................... 316
11. CUSTOMIZATION .............................................................................................................................. 322
11.1 Customizing General Settings for Basic Operation Package 1 .................................................... 323
11.1.1 Setting general options for Basic Operation Package 1 ............................................................... 325
11.1.2 Setting soft keys ........................................................................................................................... 327
11.1.3 Setting screen colors .................................................................................................................... 330
11.1.4 Setting the path number output option ......................................................................................... 332
11.2 Customizing Screens .......................................................................................................................... 333
11.2.1 Creating custom screens............................................................................................................... 334
11.2.2 Changing the order in which screens appear................................................................................ 341
11.2.3 Deleting screens ........................................................................................................................... 342
11.2.4 Showing or hiding chapters.......................................................................................................... 343
11.2.5 Setting soft keys as empty ............................................................................................................ 345
11.3 Customizing Screen Objects ............................................................................................................. 347
11.3.1 Creating custom screen objects.................................................................................................... 349
11.3.2 Changing settings of screen objects ............................................................................................. 355
11.3.3 Deleting screen objects ................................................................................................................ 356
11.4 Customizing Message Languages..................................................................................................... 358
11.4.1 Installing message languages ....................................................................................................... 359
11.4.2 Switching the message language .................................................................................................. 360
11.4.3 Changing the order in which message languages are listed.......................................................... 362
c-5
CONTENTS
B-62994EN/02
11.4.4 Uninstalling message languages................................................................................................... 363
11.5 Customizing Alarm Messages ........................................................................................................... 364
11.6 Integrating DNC Operation Management Package ........................................................................ 367
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION
PACKAGE 1 SCREEN .............................................................................................. 371
APPENDIX 2 BACKING UP THE SETTING FILE ........................................................... 419
APPENDIX 3 CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL ........................................................... 420
APPENDIX 4 SWITCHING THE MESSAGE LANGUAGE ........................................ 430
APPENDIX 5 MESSAGE FILE GENERATOR ...................................................................... 434
c-6
PREFACE
B-62994EN/02
PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing the FANUC Basic Operation Package 1.
FANUC Basic Operation Package 1 (called Basic Operation Package 1
hereinafter) allows the user to perform basic CNC and PMC operations in an
Open CNC environment.
Basic Operation Package 1 is supported by Microsoft Windows. This
manual does not explain the basic common operations of Windows.
Users who are using Windows for the first time should read the manuals on
Windows first to become familiar with the basic operation of Windows.
Read this manual thoroughly to ensure the correct use of Basic Operation
Package 1.
NOTE
The purchased software product can be copied within the plant, as
required. The machine tool builder should ship machines together with
a backup copy of the software product.
FANUC holds the copyright on this software product. Redistributing the
entire software product, or part of it, to a third party to develop an
application is not allowed.
Microsoft, Windows, and Visual Basic are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
ActiveX and OLE are trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Basic Operation Package 1 Features and Restrictions
Basic Operation Package 1 has the following features:
Features
l Implements the basic CNC and PMC operations under Windows, thus
providing a more user-friendly operating environment.
l Offers operability such that current users of FANUC CNCs can quickly
become familiar with the system.
l Allows customization to improve operability, such as modifying the
screen settings or adding or deleting a screen.
p-1
PREFACE
B-62994EN/02
l Provides each screen as an ActiveX component, such that it can be
embedded into a program developed with Visual Basic 4.0/5.0.
The following restrictions are imposed on Basic Operation Package 1:
Restrictions
l This software is designed to be used with a personal computer connected
to High Speed Serial Bus Type 2, the FS160i/180i/210i having personal
computer functions, a personal computer in which the NC Board has
been installed, or Intelligent Terminal Type 2. It cannot be used with the
MMC-IV, a personal computer connected to High Speed Serial Bus Type
1, or Intelligent Terminal Type 1.
l This software supports the following CNCs:
FS150-MB/TB/TTB (systems having up to 15 axes)
FS160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS180-MB/TB/TTB, FS210-MB/TB
FS160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS180-MC/TC/TTC
FS160i-MA/TA, FS180i-MA/TA, FS210i-MA/TA
Power Mate-D/H, Power Mate i-D/H
• Following CNCs connected to a commercial personal computer via
High Speed Serial Bus Type 2
FS15-MB/TB/TTB (systems having up to 15 axes)
FS16-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS18-MB/TB/TTB, FS21-MB/TB
FS16-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS18-MC/TC/TTC
FS16i-MA/TA, FS18i-MA/TA, FS21i-MA/TA
Power Mate-D/H, Power Mate i-D/H
• FA160i-MA/TA,
FS180i-MA/TA,
and
FS210i-MA/TA
having
personal computer functions
• NC Board M/T
l This software cannot be used to develop or debug ladder programs. To
develop or debug ladder programs, obtain the following options:
• When using a CNC other than the Power Mate-D/H: Ladder Editing
Package
• When using the Power Mate-D/H: FAPT LADDER II
p-2
PREFACE
B-62994EN/02
Contents of the Product Package
This product package consists of the following:
lFloppy disks
FANUC Basic Operation Package 1 (A02B-0207-K750#ZZ07)
NOTE
Read the Release Note (README.TXT), provided on the first floppy
disk of the product package. It provides detailed information on this
product package and information not described in the operator's
manual.
Organization of This Manual
This manual is organized as follows:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Explains the general precautions which must be observed to ensure safety
when using Basic Operation Package 1.
PREFACE
Briefly explains the features of Basic Operation Package 1. Also explains
how to use information on the usage of Basic Operation Package 1,
including this manual.
1. SETUP
Explains how to set up the environment for using Basic Operation
Package 1 and how to prepare Basic Operation Package 1 for use.
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
Provides basic information with which the user should be familiar before
attempting to use Basic Operation Package 1.
3. SETTING THE PARAMETERS REQUIRED TO USE BASIC OPERATION
PACKAGE 1
Explains how to set the parameters required to display the screens of
Basic Operation Package 1.
4. POSITION DISPLAY
Explains how to display positions, such as the current position, for the
program that is currently being executed.
5. NC PROGRAM
Explains how to display, edit, and check NC programs.
6. SETTING
Explains how to set data.
p-3
PREFACE
B-62994EN/02
7. SYSTEM
Explains how to display and set system-related information, and how to
input and output different types of data.
8. MESSAGES
Explains how to display alarms and other messages.
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
Explains how to perform machining-in-progress drawing when a milling
machine tool is used.
10. CUSTOM
Explains how to insert an OLE object.
11. CUSTOMIZATION
Explains how to customize Basic Operation Package 1.
APPENDIX
Provides supplementary information to be read as required, such as how
to back up the setting file.
Notation Conventions
The following explains the notation conventions used in this manual:
lMenu, command, and screen notations
Example
Explanation
[File] menu
Menu names are enclosed in brackets [ ].
[Setting...]
Command names are enclosed in brackets [ ].
[Program Edit] screen
Screen names (displayed on the title bars) are
enclosed in brackets [ ].
<OK> button
Command buttons on the display are enclosed
in angle brackets < >.
lKey notations and operation
Example
Explanation
[Enter] key
Key names are enclosed in brackets [ ].
[Ctrl]+[Tab] keys
When keys are to be pressed and held down
sequentially, the keys are indicated by
connecting them with +, as shown on the left.
Direction keys
The [→], [←], [↑], and [↓] keys are
collectively called the direction keys.
p-4
PREFACE
B-62994EN/02
lMouse operations
Example
Explanation
Click
Press a mouse button, then release it
immediately.
Double-click
Click a mouse button twice in quick
succession.
Drag
Move the mouse while holding down a mouse
button, then release the button at a desired
location.
lFolders
This manual refers to directories and folders collectively as folders.
lSample screens
The screens shown in this manual are examples of the standard system
supplied by FANUC. Note that the screen layouts and displayed file names
may vary with the equipment being used and according to customization.
Soft keys or screens are not displayed if the equipment being used does not
support the corresponding functions (for example, some functions are
supported only by machining center systems) or if the CNC options for the
corresponding functions are not installed.
lCNC units
Unless otherwise specified, FS16/18/21 refers to the FS16/18/21MB/TB/MMB/TTB,
FS16/18-MC/TC/MMC/TTC,
FS160/180/210-
MB/TB/MMB/TTB,
FS160/180-MC/TC/MMC/TTC,
FS16i/18i/21i-
MA/TA, and FS160i/180i/210i-MA/TA. FS15 also refers to the FS15MB/TB/TTB and FS150-MB/TB/TTB, while Power Mate refers to the
Power Mate-D/H and Power Mate i-D/H.
p-5
1. SETUP
B-62994EN/02
1
SETUP
This chapter explains how to set up the environment for operating Basic
Operation Package 1 and how to prepare Basic Operation Package 1 for use.
-1-
1. SETUP
1.1
B-62994EN/02
Operating Environment
The software operating environment for Basic Operation Package 1 is
described below.
u Computer
A personal computer connected to High Speed Serial Bus Type 2, the
FS160i/180i/210i having personal computer functions, a personal computer
in which the NC Board has been installed, or Intelligent Terminal Type 2
l Environmental requirements
Windows 95/Windows 98
WIN32 version
• Pentium processor with clock frequency of 75 MHz or higher
• At least 16MB of memory
WIN16 version
• i486DX2 or better CPU with clock frequency of 50 MHz or higher
• At least 12MB of memory
Windows NT 4.0
WIN32 version
• Pentium processor with clock frequency of 120 MHz or higher
• At least 32MB of memory
WIN16 version
Not supported
Windows 3.1
WIN32 version
Not supported
WIN16 version
• i486DX2 or better CPU with clock frequency of 50 MHz or higher
• At least 20MB of memory
l Recommended operating environment
Windows 95/Windows 98
WIN32 version
• Pentium processor with clock frequency of 120 MHz or higher
• At least 32MB of memory
WIN16 version
• i486DX2 or better CPU with clock frequency of 75 MHz or higher
• At least 24MB of memory
-2-
1. SETUP
B-62994EN/02
Windows NT 4.0
WIN32 version
• Pentium processor with clock frequency of 150 MHz or higher
• At least 64MB of memory
WIN16 version
Not supported
Windows 3.1
WIN32 version
Not supported
WIN16 version
• i486DX2 or better CPU with clock frequency of 75 MHz or higher
• At least 24MB of memory
l Required free space on hard disk
At least 20MB
NOTE
FANUC recommends that Basic Operation Package 1 be operated
under Windows 95/Windows 98 or Windows NT 4.0.
-3-
1. SETUP
1.2
B-62994EN/02
Installing Basic Operation Package 1
This section describes how to install Basic Operation Package 1.
NOTE
Before Basic Operation Package 1 can be installed, operations such as
driver installation and setting must be performed according to the
operating environment. For details, refer to the following documents:
l Personal computer connected to High Speed Serial Bus Type 2, the
FS160i/180i/210i having personal computer functions, or Intelligent
Terminal Type 2
• Release Note (README.TXT) on the driver library floppy disk
(A02B-0207-K730#ZZ07-1)
or
• Release Note (README.TXT) on the driver disk (A02B-0207K791#ZZ07-1)
l NC Board
• Lathe system
Release Note (README.TXT) on Disk 1 of the setup disks (A02B0234-H500)
• Machining center system
Release Note (README.TXT) on Disk 1 of the setup disks (A02B0235-H500)
Procedure
l WIN32 version
• Installing Basic Operation Package 1
1. Insert the disk (A02B-0207-K750#ZZ07-2) into the floppy disk
drive.
2. Click the [Start] button.
3. Select [Run].
4. Enter <drive-name>:SETUP, then click the <OK> button. (<drivename> is the name of the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive.)
5. Perform installation according to the displayed messages.
6. Upon the completion of installation, restart the personal computer.
The setup program of Basic Operation Package 1 installs the English
version by default. To display non-English messages (Japanese,
German, French, Italian, or Spanish), subsequently install the nonEnglish message environment, as follows.
-4-
1. SETUP
B-62994EN/02
NOTE
Before installing the Japanese message environment, start and
terminate Basic Operation Package 1 at least once.
For an
explanation of how to start and terminate Basic Operation
Package 1, see Section 2.1, "Starting and Terminating Basic
Operation Package 1."
Non-English messages can be displayed only under Windows of
the target language version. For example, Japanese messages
can be displayed only under Japanese Windows and German
messages can be displayed only under German Windows.
• Installing the non-English message environment
1. Insert the disk (A02B-0207-K750#ZZ07-5) into the floppy disk
drive.
2. Click the [Start] button.
3. Select [Run].
4. Enter the data corresponding tohe target language as listed below,
then click the <OK> button.
Japanese
<drive-name> : \JPN\ADDLANG
German
<drive-name> : \GER\ADDLANG
French
<drive-name> : \FRE\ADDLANG
Italian
<drive-name> : \ITA\ADDLANG
Spanish
<drive-name> : \SPA\ADDLANG
<drive-name> is the name of the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive.
5. Perform installation according to the displayed messages.
l WIN16 version
• Installing Basic Operation Package 1
1. Insert the disk (A02B-0207-K750#ZZ07-8) into the floppy disk
drive.
2. Click the [Start] button.
(For Windows 3.1, select [File].)
3. Select [Run].
4. Enter <drive-name>:SETUP, then click the <OK> button. (<drivename> is the name of the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive.)
5. Perform installation according to the displayed messages.
6. Upon the completion of installation, restart the personal computer.
The setup program of Basic Operation Package 1 installs the English
version by default. To display non-English messages (Japanese,
German, French, Italian, or Spanish), subsequently install the nonEnglish message environment, as follows.
-5-
1. SETUP
B-62994EN/02
NOTE
Before installing the non-English message environment, start
and terminate Basic Operation Package 1 at least once. For an
explanation of how to start and terminate Basic Operation
Package 1, see Section 2.1, "Starting and Terminating Basic
Operation Package 1."
• Installing the non-English message environment
1. Insert the disk (A02B-0207-K750#ZZ07-9) into the floppy disk
drive.
2. Click the [Start] button.
(For Windows 3.1, select [File].)
3. Select [Run].
4. Enter the data corresponding to the target language as listed below,
then click the <OK> button.
Japanese
<drive-name> : \JPN\ADDLANG
German
<drive-name> : \GER\ADDLANG
French
<drive-name> : \FRE\ADDLANG
Italian
<drive-name> : \ITA\ADDLANG
Spanish
<drive-name> : \SPA\ADDLANG
<drive-name> is the name of the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive.
5. Perform installation according to the displayed messages.
-6-
1. SETUP
B-62994EN/02
1.3
Uninstalling Basic Operation Package 1
This section describes how to uninstall Basic Operation Package 1.
NOTE
Uninstallation is supported only by the WIN32 version of Basic
Operation Package 1.
Procedure
1. Click the [Start] button.
2. Choose [Settings], then choose the [Control Panel] command.
3. Execute [Add/Remove Programs].
The [Add/Remove Programs Properties] screen appears.
4. Select Basic Operation Package 1.
5. Click the <Add/Remove> button.
The uninstall function starts, asking you whether you really want to
uninstall Basic Operation Package 1.
-7-
1. SETUP
B-62994EN/02
6. To uninstall Basic Operation Package 1, click the <Yes> button.
Subsequently, the uninstall function will ask several questions, such as
whether to delete shared files.
Perform uninstallation by clicking
<Yes> or <No> as required.
When Basic Operation Package 1 has been uninstalled normally, it is
deleted from the Windows program menu.
-8-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
2
BASIC KNOWLEDGE
This function provides basic information with which the user should be
familiar before attempting to use Basic Operation Package 1.
-9-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
2.1
B-62994EN/02
Starting and Terminating Basic Operation Package 1
This section describes how to start and terminate Basic Operation Package 1
and provides notes on starting it.
2.1.1
Starting Basic Operation Package 1
This section describes how to start Basic Operation Package 1 and provides
notes on starting it.
NOTE
In an operating environment using the NC Board, the system software
for the NC Board must be loaded before Basic Operation Package 1 is
first started after power-on.
For details, click the [Start] button, then choose [NC Board]-[Guide for
English] from the program menu. (When using Windows 3.1, open
[Guide for English] from the [NC Board] group in the Program
Manager.)
Procedure
Windows 95/Windows 98
1. Click the [Start] button.
2. Select [Program].
3. Select Basic Operation Package 1.
When High Speed Serial Bus multiconnection is being used, the node
selection screen appears if a node number has not been specified for
an argument for Basic Operation Package 1.
For an explanation of how to specify the node number, see
Section 3.2, "Specifying a Node."
4. Select the CNC to be connected.
Click the <OK> button.
-10-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
Windows 3.1
1. Start the program from the Basic Operation Package 1 group in the
Program Manager.
The Basic Operation Package 1 screen, shown below, appears.
2.1.2
Terminating Basic Operation Package 1
How to terminate Basic Operation Package 1 is described below.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection soft key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
If a check mark is not placed against "Enable the language switch
function" in the customization setting, the Basic Operation Package 1
screen disappears and Basic Operation Package 1 is terminated.
If a check mark is placed against "Enable the language switch function"
in the customization setting, the [Exit Basic Operation Package] screen
appears.
-11-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
For details of the language switch function, see Sections
11.1.1, "Setting general options for Basic Operation Package
1," and 11.4.2, "Switching the message language."
3. Select [Exit Basic Operation Package ?].
Click the <Yes> button.
The Basic Operation Package 1 screen disappears and Basic Operation
Package 1 is terminated.
If [Switch language after restart?] is selected, clicking the <Yes> button
restarts Basic Operation Package 1 using the selected language.
-12-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
2.2
Window Names and Functions
This section describes the name and functions of each window displayed by
Basic Operation Package 1.
Basic Operation Package 1 displays a parent window which consists of one or
more child windows. Each child window contains the display items of a
conventional CNC screen.
Explanation
l Parent window
• Main window of Basic Operation Package 1
• Selecting a soft key at the bottom of the parent window displays the
corresponding child window within the parent window.
• Multiple child windows can be displayed within the parent window.
• The top of the parent window indicates the function name
corresponding to the child window which is currently active and
statuses such as the CNC mode. The displayed statuses and their
meanings are as follows:
-13-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
FS15
(1) Automatic operation mode selection
Status
Meaning
****
Not selected
MDI
MDI mode
Tape
TAPE mode
Mem
MEMORY mode
Edit
EDIT mode
Thin
TEACH in mode
(2) Manual operation mode selection
Status
Meaning
****
Not selected
Ref
REFERENCE mode
Inc
INCREMENTAL mode
Hndl
HANDLE mode
Jog
JOG mode
AngJ
ANGULAR JOG mode
IHnd
INCREMENTAL + HANDLE mode
JHnd
JOG + HANDLE mode
(3) Automatic operation status
Status
Meaning
Stop
Stopped
Hold
Halted
Strt
Starting
MStr
Numeric JOG mode
Rstr
Restarting a block
PRsr
Restarting a program
NSrc
Searching for a sequence number
Rset
Resetting
HPCC
RISC operation
(4) Program editing status
Status
Meaning
****
No editing
Edit
Editing
Srch
Searching
Vrfy
Verifying
Cond
Condensing
Read
Inputting data
Pnch
Outputting data
-14-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
(5) Axial movement and dwell status
Status
Meaning
****
Others
Motn
Moving along an axis
Dwel
Dwelling
Wait
Waiting (only for 2-path lathe systems)
(6) M, S, T, and B function status
Status
Fin
Meaning
Waiting for processing
(7) Emergency stop status
Status
Emg
Meaning
Emergency stop
(8) Nonvolatile memory write status
Status
Meaning
****
No write
Writ
Writing
(9) Label skip status
Status
Meaning
****
Label skip disabled
LSk
Label skip enabled
(10) Alarm status
Status
Alam
Meaning
Alarm issued
(11) Warning message status
Status
Warn
Meaning
Warning issued
(12) Battery status
Status
Meaning
Batt
Battery of nonvolatile memory and absolute position
detector requires replacement
-15-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
FS160/180/210 or NC Board
(1) Automatic/manual mode selection
Status
Meaning
****
Not selected
MDI
MDI mode
Mem
MEMORY mode
Edit
EDIT mode
Hndl
HANDLE mode
Jog
JOG mode
TJog
TEACH in JOG mode
THnd
TEACH in HANDLE mode
Inc
INCREMENTAL mode
Ref
REFERENCE mode
Rmot
SCHEDULE mode
Test
TEST operation mode
(2) Automatic operation mode
Status
Meaning
****
Resetting
Stop
Stopped
Hold
Halted
Strt
Starting
MStr
Returning (tool retract and return), repositioning, or
operating based on a manual numeric command
-16-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
(3) Program editing status
Status
Meaning
*****
No editing
Edit
Editing
Search
Searching
Output
Outputting data
Input
Inputting data
Compare
Comparing
LblSkp
Label skip enabled
Restrt
Restarting a program
PTRR
Tool retract and return mode
HPCC
RISC operation (only for machining center systems)
Revers
Reverse movement during retrace (only for machining
center systems)
Retry
Re-forward
movement
during
retrace
(only
for
machining center systems)
RvEnd
Reverse movement completed during retrace (only for
machining center systems)
Handle
Handle interruption applied (only for machining center
systems)
WrkOfs
Workpiece origin offset measurement mode (only for
machining center systems)
SHPCC
Simple high-precision contour control applied (only for
machining center systems)
WrkSft
Work shift write mode (only for lathe systems)
Offset
Tool length offset measurement mode (for machining
center systems)/Tool length offset write mode (for lathe
systems)
(4) Axial movement and dwell status
Status
Meaning
****
Others
Motn
Moving along an axis
Dwel
Dwelling
(5) M, S, T, and B function status
Status
Fin
-17-
Meaning
Waiting for processing
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
(6) Emergency stop status
Status
Meaning
Emg
Emergency stop
Rset
Reset
(7) Alarm status
Status
Meaning
Alam
Alarm issued
Batt
Battery of nonvolatile memory and absolute position
detector requires replacement
For details of each status, refer to the operator's manual provided with
the CNC being used.
l Child window
• Window which implements the display items of an individual CNC screen
• Chapter and function
A collection of child windows is called a chapter.
A collection of chapters is called a function.
Basic Operation Package 1 is configured with the function and chapter
hierarchy shown below.
Functions and chapters can be selected using the soft keys at the
bottom of the parent window.
-18-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
l Soft key
• Key-like field used to display a child window. A soft key can be
selected either by clicking the image on the screen or pressing the
corresponding key on the keyboard.
In the standard state, where no soft key customization has been
performed, the soft keys are assigned to the following keyboard keys.
The subsequent descriptions in this manual assume the standard soft
key assignment.
NOTE
The soft keys can be customized. For details, see Section 11.1.2,
"Setting soft keys."
• There are the following three types of soft key states:
"Function
selection," "chapter selection," and "operation selection."
For example, the soft keys used for [Position] are switched as follows:
-19-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
• Function selection state
Soft key
Soft key
Soft key
or
or
or
[F1] key
[F1] key
[F1] key
• Chapter selection state
Soft key
Soft key
Soft key
or
or
or
[F12] key
[F12] key
[F12] key
• Operation selection state
The displayed soft keys are for the currently active child window.
NOTE
l The subsequent descriptions in this manual refer to the selection of a
soft key as simply "pressing a soft key," meaning either clicking the
soft key image on the screen or pressing the corresponding key on
the keyboard.
-20-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
2.3
Selecting and Positioning Windows
This section describes how to select and position child windows.
NOTE
Settings may have been made so that the position and size of a
window cannot be changed. For details, see Section 11.1.1, "Setting
general options for Basic Operation Package 1."
2.3.1
Selecting a window
A child window can be selected using the mouse or keyboard.
Procedure
1. Click the window to be selected.
Alternatively, hold down the [Alt] key and press the key corresponding
to the number of the child window (indicated on the title bar).
-21-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
2.3.2
B-62994EN/02
Positioning a window
The size and position of a child window can be changed as required, using the
mouse or automatic positioning function.
The changed screen display information is stored even when Basic Operation
Package 1 is terminated.
(The changed screen display information is stored in the setting file
upon the termination of Basic Operation Package 1. For details of the setting
file, see Appendix 2, "BACKING UP THE SETTING FILE.")
NOTE
l A child window can be moved only within the parent window.
l Some child windows automatically change their display format
according to the vertical/horizontal ratio of the window.
l Positioning a child window using the mouse
Dragging the title bar or an edge of a child window enables the position and
size of the child window to be changed as required.
l Positioning child windows using the automatic positioning function
This function automatically positions the child windows so that they fit in
the parent window.
-22-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
Procedure
Vertically aligning the child windows
1. Right-click the soft key area.
Alternatively, press the [Application] key on the keyboard (such as
the Microsoft Natural keyboard or 109 keyboard).
Alternatively, press [Shift]+[F10].
The following pop-up menu appears:
2. In this case, choose [Tile Vertical].
The child windows are automatically positioned within the parent
window.
-23-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
2.4
B-62994EN/02
Selecting a Path
If the CNC has multiple paths, select the path to be used as described below.
NOTE
The selection of a path is supported only by TT and MM CNCs and
CNCs having a loader.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection soft key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
The [Path Setting] screen appears.
3. Select the path to be used for operation.
Click the <OK> button.
-24-
2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
B-62994EN/02
2.5
Displaying Version Information
This section describes how to display the version information for Basic
Operation Package 1, for maintenance and other purposes.
Procedure
1. Right-click the soft key area.
Alternatively, press the [Application] key on the keyboard (such as the
Microsoft Natural keyboard or 109 keyboard).
Alternatively, press [Shift]+[F10].
The following pop-up menu appears:
2. Choose [About Basic Operation Package...].
The [About Basic Operation Package] screen appears.
The following information is displayed:
• Version information for Basic Operation Package 1
• CNC type ("99" for the NC Board)
• CNC software series
• CNC software version
• Number of controlled axes
-25-
3. SETTING THE PARAMETERS REQUIRED TO USE BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1
3
B-62994EN/02
SETTING THE PARAMETERS REQUIRED
TO USE BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1
This chapter describes how to set the parameters required to display the
screens of Basic Operation Package 1.
-26-
B-62994EN/02
3.1
3. SETTING THE PARAMETERS REQUIRED TO USE BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1
Setting the CNC Parameters
This section describes how to set the CNC parameters required to use Basic
Operation Package 1.
NOTE
If the CNC parameters are not set, screen display and the writing of
programs and MDI commands cannot be performed normally.
NOTE
To set the parameters, first establish the following status:
l Setting data
• Parameter Write enabled
l Operation
Set either of the following statuses:
• Emergency stop
• Stopped or paused in MDI mode
For an explanation of how to specify the setting data, see Section 6.1,
"Setting Data."
To change the CNC operating mode from the software operator's panel,
see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel Settings."
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection soft key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Parameter] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection soft key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Parameter] screen appears.
-27-
3. SETTING THE PARAMETERS REQUIRED TO USE BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
Set the following parameters:
l FS15
Description
Set value
TV check
No. 0000 bit 0 → 0
Foreground input device
No. 0020
→ 16
Background input device
No. 0022
→ 16
Enable overwriting of program from outside of NC
No. 2200 bit 1 → 1
Use M02 and M30 to terminate registration
No. 2200 bit 3 → 1
Enable background editing
No. 2201 bit 6 → 1
Use position display
No. 2204 bit 1 → 1
Use dynamic data display
No. 7613 bit 0 → 1
Use actual speed display
No. 7613 bit 1 → 1
Use spindle speed display
No. 7613 bit 2 → 1
Use program check
No. 7710 bit 7 → 1
The above settings for the foreground input device and background
input device are required to use the program edit screen of Basic
Operation Package 1.
To change the setting of each input device, refer to the FS15
parameter manual.
l FS16/18/21 or NC Board
Description
Set value
TV check
No. 0000 bit 0 → 0
Enable overwriting of program from outside of NC
No. 2200 bit 1 → 1
Use M02, M30, and M99 to terminate registration
No. 2200 bit 3 → 1
-28-
B-62994EN/02
3.2
3. SETTING THE PARAMETERS REQUIRED TO USE BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1
Specifying a Node
This section describes how to specify a node number for Basic Operation
Package 1.
NOTE
A node can be specified only when the WIN32 version is used with
High Speed Serial Bus multiconnection.
Explanation
A node number can be specified as an argument for Basic Operation
Package 1. The format is as follows:
WINBOP32.EXE /NODE=<node-number>
As a node number, specify the number which was set during the installation
of the High Speed Serial Bus driver.
-29-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
4
B-62994EN/02
POSITION DISPLAY
This chapter describes how to display positions, such as the current position.
-30-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
4.1
Overall Position Display
This section describes how to display the overall position display (including
the relative position, absolute position, machine position, and distance to go)
for the program that is currently being executed.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection soft key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Over All Position] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection soft key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Over All Position] screen appears.
-31-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Overall position display
The overall position display includes the relative position, absolute
position, machine position, and distance to go for the program that is
currently being executed.
To perform operation such as setting the origin for the relative
coordinates, press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
For details of each function, see the following sections:
Origin Relative Position: Section 4.2.1, "Resetting relative coordinates"
Preset Relative Position: Section 4.2.2, "Presetting relative coordinates"
Set Float Point:
Section 4.2.3, "Setting the machine position
to the floating reference position"
Preset Work Coord.:
Section 4.2.4, "Presetting the workpiece
coordinate system"
NOTE
When a child window other than the overall position child window
is selected, the operation soft keys do not appear.
For floating reference position setting, a CNC option is required.
When the FS16/18/21 or NC Board is used, a CNC option is
required for workpiece coordinate system presetting.
l Modal screen
Displays modal information about the program that is currently being
executed, such as G codes. No operation can be performed on this
screen.
l Actual speed screen
Displays the feedrate for the program that is currently being executed.
No operation can be performed on this screen.
-32-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
4.2
Displaying the Relative Position
This section describes how to display the relative position for the program
that is currently being executed.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection soft key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Relative Position] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection soft key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Relative Position] screen appears.
-33-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Relative position screen
Displays the relative position for the program that is currently being
executed.
To perform an operation such as setting the origin for the relative
coordinates, press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
For details of each function, see the following sections:
Origin Relative Position: Section 4.2.1, "Resetting relative coordinates"
Preset Relative Position: Section 4.2.2, "Presetting relative coordinates"
Set Float Point:
Section 4.2.3, "Setting the machine position
to the floating reference position"
Preset Work Coord.:
Section 4.2.4, "Presetting the workpiece
coordinate system"
NOTE
When a child window other than the overall position child window
is selected, the operation soft keys do not appear.
For floating reference position setting, a CNC option is required.
When the FS16/18/21 or NC Board is used, a CNC option is
required for workpiece coordinate system presetting.
When the Power Mate is used, floating reference position setting
and
workpiece
coordinate
system
presetting
cannot
be
performed.
l Actual speed screen
Displays the feedrate for the program that is currently being executed.
No operation can be performed on this screen.
-34-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
4.2.1
Resetting relative coordinates
The coordinates of the relative position can be reset to 0.
Procedure
1. If the [Relative Position] screen (or [Over All Position] screen) is
currently not displayed, display the [Relative Position] screen (or [Over
All Position] screen) by applying the procedure explained in Section
4.2, "Displaying the Relative Position" (or Section 4.1, " Overall
Position Display").
(Example with the [Relative Position] screen)
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Position - Origin Relative Position] screen appears.
-35-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
3. From the list of the coordinate axes, select one or more axes for which
the relative coordinates are to be reset.
To select all the axes, click the <Set All> button.
To deselect all the axes, click the <Clear All> button.
4. Clicking the <OK> button resets the selected relative coordinates to 0.
4.2.2
Presetting relative coordinates
The coordinates of the relative position can be preset to an entered value.
Procedure
1. If the [Relative Position] screen (or [Over All Position] screen) is
currently not displayed, display the [Relative Position] screen (or [Over
All Position] screen) by applying the procedure explained in Section
4.2, "Displaying the Relative Position" (or Section 4.1, " Overall
Position Display").
-36-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
(Example with the [Relative Position] screen)
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Position - Preset Relative Position] screen appears.
3. Select the axis for which the relative coordinate is to be preset.
Enter the value to which the relative coordinate is to be preset.
4. Clicking the <OK> button presets the selected relative coordinate.
-37-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
4.2.3
B-62994EN/02
Setting the machine position to the floating reference position
The machine position can be set to the floating reference position.
NOTE
To set the floating reference position, the corresponding CNC option is
required.
Procedure
1. If the [Relative Position] screen (or [Over All Position] screen) is
currently not displayed, display the [Relative Position] screen (or [Over
All Position] screen) by applying the procedure explained in Section
4.2, "Displaying the Relative Position" (or Section 4.1, "Overall
Position Display").
(Example with the [Relative Position] screen)
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Position - Floating Reference Point] screen appears.
-38-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
3. Select one or more axes for which the machine position is to be set to
the floating reference position.
To select all the axes, click the <Set All> button.
To deselect all the axes, click the <Clear All> button.
Clicking the <OK> button sets the machine position to the floating
reference position.
The set values can be checked by referencing parameter No. 1244.
4.2.4
Presetting the workpiece coordinate system
The workpiece coordinate system can be preset.
The absolute coordinate on the preset axis is set as follows:
Absolute coordinate value = current absolute coordinate value - the value
on the corresponding axis for workpiece origin offset number 0
NOTE
To preset the workpiece coordinate system for the FS160/180/210 or
NC Board, the corresponding CNC option is required.
The workpiece coordinate system cannot be preset for the Power
Mate.
Procedure
1. If the [Over All Position] screen (or [Relative Position] screen) is
currently not displayed, display the [Over All Position] screen (or
[Relative Position] screen) by applying the procedure explained in
Section 4.1, "Overall Position Display" (or Section 4.2, "Displaying the
Relative Position").
-39-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
(Example with the [Over All Position] screen)
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Position - Preset Work Coordinate] screen appears.
3. Select one or more axes for which the workpiece coordinate system is to
be preset.
To select all the axes, click the <Set All> button.
To deselect all the axes, click the <Clear All> button.
Clicking the <OK> button presets the workpiece coordinate system.
-40-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
4.
Clicking the <OK> button presets the workpiece coordinate system.
-41-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
4.3
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the Absolute Position
This section describes how to display the absolute position for the program
that is currently being executed.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection soft key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Absolute Position] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection soft key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Absolute Position] screen appears.
Explanation
l Absolute position screen
Displays the absolute position.
To perform an operation such as setting the floating reference position,
press the operation selection key
-42-
.
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
The operation soft keys appear.
For details of each function, see the following sections:
Set Float Point: Section 4.2.3, "Setting the machine position to the
floating reference position"
Preset Work Coord.: Section 4.2.4, "Presetting the workpiece coordinate
system"
l Actual speed screen
Displays the actual cutting feedrate and spindle speed.
No operations can be performed on this screen.
-43-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
4.4
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the Machine Position
This section describes how to display the machine position for the program
that is currently being executed.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection soft key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Machine Position] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection soft key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Machine Position] screen appears.
Explanation
l Machine position screen
Displays the machine position for the program that is currently being
executed. No operation can be performed on this screen.
l Actual speed screen
Displays the feedrate for the program that is currently being executed.
No operation can be performed on this screen.
-44-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
4.5
Displaying the Distance to Go
This section describes how to display the distance to go in the current block
of the program that is currently being executed.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection soft key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Distance to Go] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection soft key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Distance to Go] screen appears.
Explanation
l Distance to Go screen
Displays the distance to go in the current block of the program that is
currently being executed. No operation can be performed on this screen.
l Actual speed screen
Displays the feedrate for the program that is currently being executed.
No operation can be performed on this screen.
-45-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
4.6
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the Amount of Handle Interruption
This section describes how to display the amount of handle interruption.
NOTE
When the FS15, FS16/18/21, Power Mate-H, or NC Board is used, to
display the amount of handle interruption, the corresponding CNC
option is required.
For an explanation of handle interruption, refer to the manual supplied
by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection soft key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Handle Interruption] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection soft key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Handle Interruption] screen appears.
-46-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Handle interruption screen
Displays the amount of handle interruption for the program that is
currently being executed.
To cancel the amount of handle interruption, press the operation
selection soft key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
For details, see the description below.
l Modal screen
Displays modal information about the program that is currently being
executed, such as G codes. No operation can be performed on this
screen.
l Actual speed screen
Displays the feedrate for the program that is currently being executed.
No operation can be performed on this screen.
4.6.1
Canceling the amount of handle interruption
The amount of handle interruption for the specified axis can be canceled.
Procedure
1. If the [Handle Interruption] screen is currently not displayed, display
the [Handle Interruption] screen by applying the procedure explained in
Section 4.6, "Displaying the Amount of Handle Interruption."
-47-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Manual Overlap - Cancel Overlap] screen appears.
3. Select one or more axes for which the amount of handle interruption is
to be canceled.
To select all the axes, click the <Set All> button.
To deselect all the axes, click the <Clear All> button.
Clicking the <OK> button cancels the amount of handle interruption for
the specified axes.
-48-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
4.7
Displaying the Operating Monitor
This section describes how to display the operating monitor.
NOTE
When the Power Mate is used, the operating monitor screen cannot
be displayed.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection soft key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Operating Monitor] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection soft key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Operating Monitor] screen appears.
Explanation
l Operating monitor screen
Displays the load (torque) values for the spindle and servo motors. No
operation can be performed on this screen.
-49-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
4.8
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the Machining Time and Machined Parts Count
This section describes how to display the machining time and machined parts count.
NOTE
In the standard state, this screen cannot be displayed.
Create a
screen containing screen object ID "CutTime" according to the
description in Section 11.2.1, "Creating the custom screens."
To display this screen for the FS16/18/21 or NC Board, the
corresponding CNC option is required.
The [Cut Time and Parts Count] screen is displayed.
Explanation
l Machining time and machined parts count
• Parts count
Displays the number of machined parts.
• Run time
Displays the accumulated operating time during automatic operation
(excluding stopped and paused time).
• Cycle time
Displays the operating time during 1 cycle of automatic operation
(excluding stopped and paused time).
l Operation soft keys
-50-
4. POSITION DISPLAY
B-62994EN/02
• Clear Parts Count
Pressing the
soft key clears the parts count to 0.
• Clear Run Time
Pressing the
-51-
soft key clears the run time to 0.
5. NC PROGRAM
5
B-62994EN/02
NC PROGRAM
This chapter explains how to display, edit, and check NC programs stored in
the CNC.
-52-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.1
Editing a NC Program
This section explains how to edit a program.
WARNING
l A program in CNC program memory cannot be updated simply by
editing the NC program on the program edit screen of Basic
Operation Package 1. The NC program must be written back to the
CNC after editing.
l After writing an edited NC program back to the CNC, never attempt
to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the
machine.
Before starting the machine, check that the NC
programmed values, compensation values, current position, and
external signal settings are correct.
NOTE
To edit a program, set the following status:
u Foreground editing (Any NC program can be created, edited, and
deleted.)
FS15
l Operation
• Reset in EDIT mode
l Protect key
• Released
FS16/18/21, Power Mate, or NC Board
l Operation
• Reset in EDIT mode
• P/S alarm 000 (PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) and P/S
alarm 101 (PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY) already released
l Protect key
• Released
u Background editing (A program other than the selected program
can be created, edited, and deleted.)
FS15
l Operation
• Other than EDIT mode
l Protect key
• Released
(to be continued to the next page)
-53-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
NOTE (Continued)
u Background editing (A program other than the selected program
can be created, edited, and deleted.)
FS16/18/21 or NC Board
l Operation
• Reset in EDIT mode or MDI mode
• P/S alarm 000 (PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) and P/S
alarm 101 (PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY) already released
l Protect key
• Released
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
To change the CNC operating mode from the software operator's
panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel Settings."
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is not currently displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Program Edit] screen is not currently displayed, press the chapter
selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Program Edit] screen appears.
-54-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Program edit screen
A program can be edited by positioning the cursor to the character string
you want to modify.
Once an edit operation has been performed, "Modified" is displayed in
the upper right part of the child window.
To use a function of, for example, "Get from NC," or "Write Back to
NC," press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
Pressing the
displays the operation soft keys on the next page.
For details of each function, see the description below.
-55-
5. NC PROGRAM
5.1.1
B-62994EN/02
Getting a program from the NC
A program can be read from CNC program memory to the edit screen of
Basic Operation Package 1.
The program currently displayed on the program edit screen is replaced by
the program read from the CNC.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Edit] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.1, "Editing a Program."
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Program Edit - Get from NC] screen appears.
-56-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
NOTE
When some modifications have been made to the NC
program already displayed on the NC program edit screen, a
prompt appears asking you whether you want to write the NC
program back to the CNC.
To write the NC program back to the CNC, click the <OK>
button. Perform a write operation by following the procedure
explained in Section 5.1.2, "Writing a program back to the NC."
When you don't want to write the NC program back to the CNC,
click the <Cancel> button. Then, the modified NC program is
discarded.
3. Select the NC program you want to get from the NC.
Click the <OK> button.
-57-
5. NC PROGRAM
5.1.2
B-62994EN/02
Writing a NC program back to the NC
A NC program on the edit screen of Basic Operation Package 1 can be
written back to the CNC.
NOTE
When the FS16/18/21 or NC Board is being used, this function cannot
be used in MDI mode.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Edit] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.1, "Editing a NC Program."
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Program Edit - Write Back to NC] screen appears.
3. Specify the name of a NC program to be written back to the CNC.
When the NC program to be written is to be executed next, click the
[Save as main] check box.
Click the <OK> button.
-58-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.1.3
Inserting a NC program from a disk
A NC program stored on an external memory unit such as a hard disk can be
inserted into the edit screen of Basic Operation Package 1.
The NC program read from the external memory unit is inserted into an
existing NC program displayed on the [Program Edit] screen.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Edit] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.1, "Editing a NC Program."
2. Move the cursor to a position at which you want to insert a NC
program.
3. Press the
soft key.
The [Open] screen appears.
-59-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
4. Select the NC program to be inserted from the external memory unit.
Click the <Open> button.
The selected file contents are inserted at the cursor position.
5.1.4
Writing a NC program to a disk
A NC program on the edit screen of Basic Operation Package 1 can be
written to an external memory unit such as a hard disk.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Edit] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.1, "Editing a NC Program."
-60-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Save As] screen appears.
3. Enter the name of the NC program to be written to the external memory
unit.
Click the <Save> button.
5.1.5
Finding a character string in a NC program
A search can be made for a specified character string in a NC program.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Edit] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.1, "Editing a NC Program."
-61-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Program Edit - Find] screen appears.
3. Enter the character string for which a search is to be made.
Specify the search direction as necessary.
Click the <OK> button.
To search for another character string, repeat steps 2 and 3, above.
5.1.6
Replacing a character string in a NC program
A specified character string in a NC program can be replaced with another
character string.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Edit] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.1, "Editing a NC Program."
-62-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Program Edit - Replace] screen appears.
3. Enter the character string you want to find, and the character string
with which you want to replace that character string.
Specify the search direction as necessary.
Click the <OK> button.
To perform another replacement, repeat steps 2 and 3, above.
5.1.7
Selecting character strings in a NC program
Character strings to be "cut" or "copied" can be selected from a NC program.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Edit] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.1, "Editing a NC Program."
-63-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Position the cursor to the beginning or end of the character strings to be
selected.
soft key.
3. Press the
4. Select the character strings by using the direction keys.
Cut or copy can be performed by selecting the
or
soft key.
Character strings can also be selected by pressing a direction key
while holding down the [Shift] key.
To cancel character string selection mode, press the
soft
key again.
5.1.8
Cutting character strings from a NC program
Character strings in a NC program can be cut.
Procedure
1. Select the character strings you want to cut from a NC program.
For an explanation of how to select character strings, see Section 5.1.7,
"Selecting character strings in a NC program."
-64-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The selected character strings are cut.
The character strings can also be cut by pressing the [Ctrl]+[X] keys
instead of pressing the
soft key.
The cut character strings can be pasted by pressing the
soft key.
-65-
5. NC PROGRAM
5.1.9
B-62994EN/02
Copying character strings from a NC program
Character strings in a program can be copied for subsequent pasting.
Procedure
1. Select the character strings you want to copy from the program.
For an explanation of how to select character strings, see Section 5.1.7,
"Selecting character strings in a NC program."
2. Press the
soft key.
The selected character strings are copied.
The display remains as is.
The character strings can also be copied by pressing the [Ctrl]+[C]
keys instead of pressing the
soft key.
The copied character strings can be pasted by pressing the
soft key.
-66-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.1.10
Pasting character strings into a NC program
The cut or copied character strings can be pasted at a specified position.
Procedure
1. Select the character strings you want to paste.
For an explanation of how to select character strings, see Section 5.1.7,
"Selecting character strings in a NC program."
2. Press the
soft key.
Or, press the
In this example,
soft key.
is pressed.
3. Position the cursor to the point where you want to paste the character
strings.
4. Press the
soft key.
-67-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
The character strings can also be pasted by pressing the [Ctrl]+[V]
keys instead of the
5.1.11
soft key.
Inserting sequence numbers into a NC program
Sequence numbers can be inserted automatically when a new NC program is
created.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Edit] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.1, "Editing a NC Program."
-68-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Program Edit - Insert Sequence Number] screen appears.
3. Check the [Insert sequence number] check box, and set the initial value
and increment.
Click the <OK> button.
Sequence numbers are automatically inserted as a new NC program is
created.
Automatic insertion of sequence numbers is also enabled by
specifying setting data. For an explanation of how to specify setting
data, see Section 6.1, "Setting Data."
Explanation
The values on the [Program Edit - Insert Sequence Number] screen can
also be set using the following parameters:
-69-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
l FS15
Meaning
Setting
Enabling automatic insertion
No. 0010 bit 1 → 1
Initial value and increment
No. 3216
l FS16/18/21 or NC Board
Meaning
Setting
Enabling automatic insertion
No. 0000 bit 5 → 1
Initial value
No. 0031
Increment
No. 0032
-70-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.1.12
Entering a coordinate value into a NC program
The current absolute coordinate value can be entered into a program.
NOTE
A CNC option (playback) is required to enter a coordinate value into a
program.
Before entering a coordinate value into the program, change from the
operation status explained in Section 5.1, "Editing a NC Program," to
the following CNC operating mode:
• Teach in Handle mode
or
• Teach in JOG mode
When the Power Mate is used, no CNC option is required to enter a
coordinate value into a program.
Change the operation status
explained in Section 5.1, "Editing a Program," to the following CNC
operating mode:
• Teach in JOG/Handle mode
Procedure
1. If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Edit] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.1, "Editing a NC Program."
-71-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Position the cursor to the point where a coordinate value is to be
entered.
3. Press the
soft key.
The [Program Edit - Teach In] screen appears.
4. Select the axis for which a coordinate value is to be entered.
Click the <OK> button.
The absolute coordinate value is inserted into the NC program.
-72-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.1.13
Displaying the top of a NC program
The top of a NC program can be displayed.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Edit] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.1, "Editing a NC Program."
2. Press the
soft key.
The top of the NC program is displayed with the cursor positioned to
the top of the NC program.
-73-
5. NC PROGRAM
5.1.14
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the end of a NC program
The end of a NC program can be displayed.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Edit] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.1, "Editing a NC Program."
2. Press the
soft key.
The end of a NC program is displayed with the cursor positioned to the
end of the NC program.
-74-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.1.15
Stamping the machining time
The machining time for an executed NC program can be inserted into the NC
program as a comment.
NOTE
When the FS15, FS16/18/21, or NC Board is used, a CNC option is
required for stamping the machining time. When the machining time
is to be stamped for a NC program, the NC program must have been
executed at least once since the CNC was turned on.
When the Power Mate is used, the machining time cannot be
stamped.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Edit] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.1, "Editing a NC Program."
2. Press the
soft key.
When the NC program has already been executed, the machining time
is stamped.
-75-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
If the NC program has not yet been executed, the following message
appears:
-76-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.2
Editing an MDI Program
This section explains how to edit an MDI program.
WARNING
After editing an MDI program, never attempt to machine a workpiece
without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting
the machine, check that the programmed values, compensation
values, current position, and external signal settings are correct.
NOTE
To edit an MDI program, set the following status:
l Operation
• Stopped or paused in MDI mode
To change the CNC operating mode from the software operator's
panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel Settings."
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [MDI Program] screen appears.
-77-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
lMDI program screen
An MDI program can be edited by positioning the cursor to the character
string you wish to edit.
To use a function such as "Find" or "Replace" for a program, press the
operation selection key
The operation soft keys appear.
Pressing
displays the operation soft keys on the next page.
For details of each function, see the description below.
-78-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.2.1
Finding a character string in an MDI program
A search can be made for a specified character string in an MDI program.
Procedure
1. If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[MDI Program] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.2, "Editing an MDI Program."
2. Press the
soft key.
The [MDI Program - Find] screen appears.
3. Enter the character string for which a search is to be made.
Specify the search direction as necessary.
Click the <OK> button.
To perform another search operation, repeat steps 2 and 3 above.
-79-
5. NC PROGRAM
5.2.2
B-62994EN/02
Replacing a character string in an MDI program
A specified character string in an MDI program can be replaced with another,
specified character string.
Procedure
1. If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[MDI Program] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.2, "Editing an MDI Program."
2. Press the
soft key.
The [MDI Program - Replace] screen appears.
3. Enter the character string you want to find, and the character string
with which you want to replace the found character string.
Specify the search direction as necessary.
Click the <OK> button.
To perform another replacement operation, repeat steps 2 and 3 above.
-80-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.2.3
Selecting character strings in an MDI program
Character strings to be "cut" or "copied" can be selected from an MDI
program.
Procedure
1. If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[MDI Program] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.2, "Editing an MDI Program."
2. Position the cursor to the beginning or end of the character strings to be
selected.
3. Press the
4.
soft key.
Select the character strings by using the direction keys.
-81-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
The selected character strings can be cut or copied by pressing the
or
soft key.
Character strings can also be selected by pressing a direction key
while holding down the [Shift] key.
To cancel character string selection mode, press the
soft
key again.
5.2.4
Cutting character strings from an MDI program
Character strings in an MDI program can be cut.
Procedure
1. Select the character strings to be cut from the MDI program.
For an explanation of how to select character strings, see Section 5.2.3,
"Selecting character strings in an MDI program."
-82-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The selected character strings are cut.
The character strings can also be cut by pressing the [Ctrl]+[X] keys
instead of pressing the
soft key.
The cut character strings can be pasted by pressing the
soft key.
-83-
5. NC PROGRAM
5.2.5
B-62994EN/02
Copying character strings from an MDI program
Character strings in an MDI program can be copied for subsequent pasting.
Procedure
1. Select the character strings to be copied from the MDI program.
For an explanation of how to select character strings, see Section 5.2.3,
"Selecting character strings in an MDI program."
2. Press the
soft key.
The selected character strings are then copied.
The display remains as is.
The character strings can also be copied by pressing the [Ctrl]+[C]
keys instead of pressing the
soft key.
The copied character strings can be pasted by pressing the
soft key.
-84-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.2.6
Pasting character strings into an MDI program
Cut or copied character strings can be pasted into a specified position.
Procedure
1. Select the character strings to be pasted from an MDI program.
For an explanation of how to select character strings, see Section 5.2.3,
"Selecting character strings in an MDI program."
2. Press the
soft key.
Or, press the
In this example,
soft key.
is pressed.
3. Position the cursor to the point where the character strings are to be
pasted.
4. Press the
soft key.
-85-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
The character strings can also be pasted by pressing the [Ctrl]+[V]
keys instead of the
5.2.7
soft key.
Inserting sequence numbers into an MDI program
Sequence numbers can be automatically inserted into a new MDI program as
it is being created.
Procedure
1. If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[MDI Program] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.2, "Editing an MDI Program."
-86-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The [MDI Program - Insert Sequence Number] screen appears.
3. Check the [Insert sequence number] check box, and set the initial
value and increment.
Click the <OK> button.
Sequence numbers are automatically inserted into a new MDI program as it
is being created.
Explanation
The values on the [MDI Program - Insert Sequence Number] screen can
also be set using the following parameters:
l FS15
Meaning
Setting
Enabling automatic insertion
No. 0010 bit 1 → 1
Initial value and increment
No. 0031
Increment
No. 0032
-87-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
l FS16/18/21 or Power Mate NC Board
Meaning
5.2.8
Setting
Enabling automatic insertion
No. 0000 bit 5 → 1
Increment
No. 3216
Displaying the top of an MDI program
The top of an MDI program can be displayed.
Procedure
1. If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[MDI Program] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.2, "Editing an MDI Program."
2. Press the
soft key.
The top of the program is displayed, with the cursor placed at the top
of the program.
-88-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.2.9
Displaying the end of an MDI program
The end of an MDI program can be displayed.
Procedure
1. If the [MDI Program] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[MDI Program] screen by applying the procedure explained in Section
5.2, "Editing an MDI Program."
2. Press the
soft key.
The end of the program is displayed, with the cursor placed at the end
of the program.
-89-
5. NC PROGRAM
5.3
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the NC Program Directory
This section explains how to display the NC program directory, and perform
editing on a program-by-program basis, such as copying and deleting a NC
program.
WARNING
After NC program editing, never attempt to machine a workpiece
without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting
the machine, check that the NC programmed values, compensation
values, current position, and external signal settings are correct.
NOTE
To perform NC program editing, set the following status:
u Foreground editing (Any NC program can be created, edited, and
deleted.)
FS15
l Operation
• Reset in EDIT mode
l Protect key
• Released
FS16/18/21, Power Mate or NC Board
l Operation
• Reset in EDIT mode
• P/S alarm 000 (PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) and P/S
alarm 101 (PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY) already released
l Protect key
• Released
u Background editing (A NC program other than the selected
program can be created, edited, and deleted.)
FS15
l Operation
• Other than EDIT mode
l Protect key
• Released
(To be continued to the next page)
-90-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
NOTE (Continued)
u Background editing (A program other than the selected program
can be created, edited, and deleted.)
FS16/18/21, Power Mate, NC Board
l Operation
• Reset in EDIT mode or MDI mode
• P/S alarm 000 (PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) and P/S
alarm 101 (PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY) already released
l Protect key
• Released
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
To change the CNC operating mode from the software operator's
panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel Settings."
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Program Directory] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Program Directory] screen appears.
-91-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Program directory screen
A list of the NC programs stored in the CNC is displayed.
To use a function such as the "Copy" or "Delete" function for a NC
program, press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
For details of each function, see the description below.
5.3.1
Copying a NC program
A NC program can be copied.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Directory] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Directory] screen by applying the procedure explained in
Section 5.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory."
-92-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Select one NC program as the copy source from the directory.
3. Press the
soft key.
The [Program Directory - Copy] screen appears.
4. Enter the NC program name of the copy destination.
The NC program name of the copy source can also be changed.
Click the <OK> button.
-93-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
NOTE
When an existing program name is specified as the program name of
the copy destination, the original program is replaced by the copied
program. The original program is lost.
5.3.2
Deleting a NC program
A NC program can be deleted.
NOTE
A NC program that is currently being executed cannot be deleted.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Directory] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Directory] screen by applying the procedure explained in
Section 5.3, "Displaying the Program Directory."
2. Select the NC program to be deleted from the directory.
3. Press the
soft key.
The [Program Directory - Delete] screen appears.
-94-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
4. Click the <OK> button.
Multiple NC programs can be deleted at one time by selecting
them from the directory.
5.3.3
Selecting a NC program to be executed
A NC program to be executed can be selected.
-95-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
NOTE
To select a NC program to be executed, set the following status:
FS15
l Operation
• EDIT mode
FS16/18/21 or NC Board
l Operation
• Reset in EDIT mode or MEMORY mode
• P/S alarm 000 (PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) and P/S
alarm 101 (PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY) already released
Power Mate
l Operation
• EDIT mode or reset in MEMORY mode
• P/S alarm 000 (PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) and P/S
alarm 101 (PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY) already released
To change the CNC operating mode from the software operator's
panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel Settings."
Procedure
1. If the [Program Directory] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Directory] screen by applying the procedure explained in
Section 5.3, "Displaying the Program Directory."
2. Select a NC program to be executed from the directory.
-96-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
3. Press the
soft key.
In the upper right part of the main window, the selected program
number is displayed.
5.3.4
Changing a NC program comment
The comments of a NC program can be changed.
NOTE
The comments of a NC program that is currently being executed
cannot be changed.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Directory] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Directory] screen by applying the procedure explained in
Section 5.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory."
2. Select one program to be renamed from the directory.
-97-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
3
Press the
soft key.
The [Program Directory - Change Program Name] screen appears.
4. Enter a new NC program comment in "Name:".
A comment of up to 49 characters can be specified.
The NC program for which the comment is to be changed can also be
changed.
Click the <OK> button.
5.3.5
Changing the NC program directory contents
The NC program directory contents can be displayed in either simplified or
detailed mode.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Directory] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Directory] screen by applying the procedure explained in
Section 5.3, "Displaying the NC Program Directory."
-98-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The NC program directory is displayed in detail.
l When the CNC option for the machining time stamp is not provided
l When the CNC option for the machining time stamp is provided
NOTE
Before the machining time can be displayed in the list, the
machining time must be stamped in each program, and the
program must be written back to the CNC.
For an explanation of the machining time stamp, see Section
5.1.15, "Stamping the machining time."
For an explanation of how to write the program back to the
CNC, see Section 5.1.2, "Writing a program back to the NC."
-99-
5. NC PROGRAM
5.4
B-62994EN/02
Checking the Program Currently Being Executed
This section explains how to check the program currently being executed.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Program Check] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Program Check] screen appears.
Explanation
l Program check screen
The NC program currently being executed is displayed on this screen.
To use a function such as that for rewinding the tape to the beginning of
the NC program, press the operation selection key
-100-
.
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
The operation soft keys appear.
For details of each function, see the following sections.
l Relative position screen
The relative position appears.
For details of operation, see Section 4.2, "Displaying the Relative
Position."
l Modal screen
Modal information such as G codes in the program currently being
executed is displayed. No operation can be performed on this screen.
5.4.1
Rewinding the tape to the beginning of the NC program
The tape can be rewound to the beginning of the NC program.
NOTE
To rewind the tape to the beginning of the NC program, set the
following status:
FS15, FS16/18/21, or NC Board
l Operation
• Stopped in MEMORY mode
Power Mate
l Operation
• Stopped in AUTO mode
Procedure
1. If the [Program Check] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Check] screen by applying the procedure explained in
Section 5.4, "Checking the NC Program Currently Being Executed."
-101-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the [Rewind] soft key.
3. The tape is rewound to the beginning of the NC program.
-102-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.4.2
Searching for a sequence number
The currently selected NC program can be searched for the specified
sequence number.
NOTE
To search for a sequence number, sequence numbers must be
inserted into the NC program.
Set the following status:
FS15, FS16/18/21, or NC Board
l Operation
• Stopped in MEMORY mode
Power Mate
l Operation
• Stopped in AUTO mode
To change the CNC operating mode from the software operator's
panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel Settings."
Procedure
1. If the [Program Check] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Check] screen by applying the procedure explained in
Section 5.4, "Checking the NC Program Currently Being Executed."
-103-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the [Sequence Number Search] soft key.
3. The [Program Check - Sequence Number Search] screen appears.
Enter the sequence number to be searched for, then click the <OK>
button.
4. The cursor moves to the specified sequence number.
-104-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.5
Displaying the Current and Next Blocks of the NC Program
Being Executed
This section explains how to display the current and next blocks of the NC
program being executed.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Current and Next Block] screen is currently not displayed, press
the chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Current and Next Block] screen appears.
Explanation
l Current block/next block screen
Information about the current and next blocks of the program being
executed is displayed.
No operation can be performed on this screen.
-105-
5. NC PROGRAM
5.6
B-62994EN/02
Restarting a NC Program
This section explains how to set the axis order of movement at NC program
restart and how to search for a block to be restarted.
NOTE
A CNC option is required to restart a program.
To restart a program, set the following status:
When the Power Mate is used, no NC program can be restarted.
To restart an NC program, set the following status:
FS15
l Operation
• Stopped or paused in MEMORY mode or TAPE mode
• Program restart signal set to ON
FS16/18/21 or NC Board
l Operation
• Stopped or paused in MEMORY mode
• Program restart signal set to ON
For explanations of how to turn on the program restart signal and how
to restart a program, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool
builder.
To change the CNC operating mode from the software operator's
panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel Settings."
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Program Restart] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Program Restart] screen appears.
-106-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Program restart screen
Information including the restart position and the amount of travel at
restart is displayed on this screen.
To use a function such as that for setting the axis order or searching for a
restart block, press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
For details of each function, see the description below.
-107-
5. NC PROGRAM
5.6.1
B-62994EN/02
Setting the axis order of movement to the program restart position
The axis order of movement to the program restart position can be set.
Procedure
1. If the [Program Restart] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Restart] screen by applying the procedure explained in
Section 5.6, "Restarting a NC Program."
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Program Restart - Axis Order] screen appears.
3. Specify the axis order (1, 2, ...) of movement to the program restart
position.
Click the <OK> button.
-108-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
5.6.2
Searching for a sequence/block number
A search can be made for the sequence/block number to restart a program.
NOTE
Before a search can be made for a sequence/block number, the axis
order of movement to the restart position must be set.
For an explanation of how to set the axis order of movement to the
restart position, see Section 5.6.1, "Setting the axis order of
movement to the program restart position."
Procedure
1. If the [Program Restart] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Program Restart] screen by applying the procedure explained in
Section 5.6, "Restarting a NC Program."
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Program Restart - Search] screen appears.
-109-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
3. To search for the sequence/block number, set the following
information:
l Restart type
l Number
l Repeat count
Click the <OK> button.
Once the sequence or block number is found, information including the
M code and T code is displayed.
If the program restart signal is not set to ON, or if the program restart
block cannot be found, an error message appears. According to the
error message, check the program restart signal status and program,
and set correct search information.
-110-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Restart type
Specify whether the power is turned off before program restart.
• Before power off (P type)
Selected when the program is restarted after the program is stopped as
a result of, for example, tool breakage.
• After power off (Q type)
Selected to restart the program in the following cases:
(1) When the power is turned off
(2) When the emergency stop button is pressed
(3) When the coordinate system is changed after the previous
automatic operation is stopped
For example:
• G92 was specified in MDI mode.
• The coordinate system was shifted.
• Automatic coordinate system setting was made by reference position
return.
• The coordinate system was changed by RESET.
l Number
Specify the type of data for which a search is to be made (sequence or
block number) and its number.
l Repeat count
Specify the number of times the sequence or block is repeated at the time
of restart. Normally, 1 is specified. However, when the same sequence
or block is repeated more than once by subprogram call, specify the
number of repetitions to be made at restart.
-111-
5. NC PROGRAM
5.7
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the Machining Times
This section explains how to display the machining times for executed NC
programs.
NOTE
A CNC option is required to display the machining times.
When the machining time for a program is to be displayed, the
program must have been executed at least once after the CNC was
turned on.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Machining Time] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Machining Time] screen appears.
-112-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
The machining times for the executed NC programs are displayed.
-113-
5. NC PROGRAM
5.8
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the B-Axis Operating Status
This section explains how to display the B-axis operating status.
NOTE
The B-axis operating status can be displayed only when the
FS16/18/160/180-TB/TTB/TC/TTC or FS16i/18i/160i/180i-TA is used.
A CNC option is required to display the B-axis operating status.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Program Check (B-Axis)] screen is currently not displayed,
press the chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Program Check (B-Axis)] screen appears.
-114-
5. NC PROGRAM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Program check (B-axis) screen
The operating status of B-axis command data is displayed on this screen.
No operation can be performed on this screen.
• Current block
Command data being executed is displayed.
• Next block
The next command data is displayed.
NOTE
For an explanation of how to set a B-axis tool offset, see Section 6.12,
"B-Axis Tool Offset Settings."
-115-
6. SETTING
6
B-62994EN/02
SETTING
This chapter describes how to set data.
-116-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.1
Setting Data
This section describes how to set TV check, Punch code, and other setting
data.
NOTE
To specify the setting data, first establish the following status:
l Operation
Set either of the following statuses:
• Emergency stop
• Stopped or paused in MDI mode
l Protect key
• Released
⋅
To change the CNC operating mode from the software operator's
panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel Settings."
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Setting (Handy)] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
.
soft key.
Press the
The [Setting (Handy)] screen appears.
-117-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Operation soft keys
To input an increment as a numeric input, press the operation selection
key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
To perform incremental input for numeric data input, press the
soft key.
l Data to be set
• Parameter write
Specify whether to enable parameter write.
When the box is checked, parameter write is enabled.
• TV check
Specify whether to execute a TV check.
When the box is checked, the TV check is executed.
-118-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
• Sequence number
Specify whether a sequence number is automatically inserted when the
program is edited in EDIT mode.
When the box is checked, the sequence number is automatically
inserted.
• Punch code
Specify the data code output by the CNC using the reader/puncher
interface.
• Input unit
Specify the input unit (millimeters or inches).
• Tape format (for FS16, FS18, FS21, and NC Board only)
Specify whether to convert to the FS15 tape format.
• I/O Channel (for FS16, FS18, and FS21 only)
Specify the channel number of the reader/puncher interface.
For details of the channel numbers that can be specified, see the
parameter description for the CNC being used.
• Device (for FS15 only)
Specify the channel number of the reader/puncher interface for
foreground editing.
For details of the channel numbers that can be specified, see the
parameter description for the CNC being used.
• Device BG.EDIT (for FS15 only)
Specify the channel number of the reader/puncher interface for
background editing.
For details of the channel numbers that can be specified, see the
parameter description for the CNC being used.
-119-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
• Sequence No. Sequence stop (for anything other than NC Board)
To execute the sequence number comparison and stop, specify a
desired sequence number.
• Program No. Sequence stop (for anything other than NC Board)
To execute the sequence number comparison and stop, specify a
desired program number in which the above sequence number resides.
• Mirror image
Specify whether to set the mirror image of each axis on or off.
NOTE
l The channel number of the reader/puncher interface set on this
screen is defined for the input/output device of the CNC.
Basic Operation Package 1 cannot control the input/output device
connected to the CNC.
-120-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.2
Operating Time, Parts Count, and Timer Settings
This section describes how to set the Operating time, Parts count, and Timer.
NOTE
To set the operating time, parts count, and timer, first establish the
following status:
l Operation
Set either of the following statuses:
• Emergency stop
• Stopped or paused in MDI mode
l Protect key
• Released
⋅
To change the CNC operating mode from the software operator's
panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel Settings."
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Setting (Timer)] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Setting (Timer)] screen appears.
-121-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Operation soft keys
To input an increment as a numeric input, press the operation selection
key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
To perform incremental input for numeric data input, press the
soft key.
l Data to be set
• Parts total
Indicates the value counted when M02, M30, or another M code
specified in a parameter is executed. The value cannot be set on this
screen but can be set by a parameter.
For details of the parameters, see the parameter description for the
CNC being used.
• Parts required
Specify the number of parts required. When zero is set, an infinite
number of parts is assumed.
This value can also be set by a parameter.
For details of the parameters, see the parameter description for the
CNC being used.
-122-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
• Parts count
Indicates the value counted when M02, M30, or another M code
specified in a parameter is executed.
The value can also be set by a parameter.
For details of the parameters, see the parameter description for the
CNC being used.
• Power on
Indicates the accumulated power-on period.
The value cannot be set on this screen. The preset value can be
specified by a parameter.
For details of the parameters, see the parameter description for the
CNC being used.
• Operating time
Indicates the accumulated operating period during automatic operation
(excluding the period while the operation is stopped or paused).
The preset value can be specified by a parameter.
For details of the parameters, see the parameter description for the
CNC being used.
• Cutting time
Indicates the accumulated cutting period by linear interpolation (G01),
circular interpolation (G02, G03), and other cutting feed.
The preset value can be specified by a parameter.
For details of the parameters, see the parameter description for the
CNC being used.
• Free purpose
This field can be used to indicate the accumulated period of a specified
task such as the coolant-on period.
For details, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
• Cycle time
Indicates the accumulated operating time during a single cycle of
automatic operation (excluding the period during which the operation
is stopped or paused).
When a cycle is started from the reset state, the indicated value is
automatically reset to 0. The value is also reset to 0 when the power is
shut down.
-123-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
NOTE
No negative values can be set in the Parts and Timer sections.
In the M and S fields of the Timer section, a value ranging from
0 to 59 can be specified.
6.3
Tool Offset Settings
This section describes how to set tool offset data.
WARNING
An invalid tool offset setting may result in unpredictable movement of
the machine, resulting in damage to the workpiece, the machine itself,
or injury to the operator or bystanders.
Set an appropriate tool offset value for the machining program.
NOTE
To set the tool offset data, set the following status:
l Protect key
• Released
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Tool Offset] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Tool Offset] screen appears.
-124-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
4. Choose the item to be set, and set a desired offset value.
Explanation
l Tool Offset screen
Specify tool offset values.
The type of the offset value that can be set depends on the CNC option.
For details, refer to the operator's manual provided with the CNC being
used.
To use the function for finding the beginning of the tool offset data, press
the operation selection key
.
The following soft keys appear.
NOTE
l The soft keys indicated above are displayed only when the Tool
Offset screen is selected.
l The Measure soft key is displayed only for a lathe system.
l With some CNC options, the following soft keys may also be
displayed:
• For a lathe system
Geom and Wear soft keys
• For a machining center system
Tool Length and Tool Diameter soft keys
-125-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
• Searching for offset data
To find the desired offset data, press the
soft key and
specify the corresponding data number.
• Incremental input
To perform incremental input, press the
soft key.
For other functions, see the description below.
The tool offset data can also be input and output by an external
input/output device. For details, see Section 7.4, "Data Input/Output."
l Relative Position screen
The relative position is indicated.
For an explanation of operations, see Section 4.2, "Displaying the
Relative Position."
-126-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.3.1
Entering a relative coordinate value as the tool offset data
A coordinate value displayed on the [Relative Position] screen can be set as
tool offset data.
Procedure
1. When the [Tool Offset] screen is currently not displayed, follow the
procedure described in Section 6.3, "Tool Offset Settings" to display
the [Tool Offset] screen.
2. Select a desired tool offset data item.
soft key.
3. Press the
The [Tool Offset - C.Input] screen appears.
4. Choose the axis of the relative coordinate value to be set.
Click the <OK> button.
-127-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Counter input
A coordinate value shown on the [Relative Position] screen can be set as
tool offset data.
In lathe systems, the relative coordinate value is set for the axis selected
on the [Tool Offset - C.Input] screen of the offset data selected in step 2
of the procedure described above.
When a relative coordinate is set as the geometry or wear offset data of a
machining center system, the following is done:
• Entering a relative coordinate value as a geometry offset value
Geometry offset value = Relative coordinate value
Wear offset value = 0
• Entering a relative coordinate value as a wear offset value
Geometry offset value = Not changed
Wear offset value = (Relative coordinate value) - (Geometry offset
value)
-128-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.3.2
Entering a measured value as the tool offset data
A measured value can be set as tool offset data.
NOTE
The measured value input function is supported only for lathe
systems.
Procedure
1. When the [Tool Offset] screen is currently not displayed, follow the
procedure described in Section 6.3, "Tool Offset Settings" to display
the [Tool Offset] screen.
2. Select a desired tool offset data item.
3. Press the
soft key.
The [Tool Offset - Measure] screen appears.
4. Choose an axis of measured value input.
Input a measured value.
Click the <OK> button.
-129-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Measured value input
The following value is set as a tool offset value.
Tool offset value = (Absolute coordinate value) - (Measured value)
When a measured value is input for geometry or wear offset, the
following value is set:
• Entering a measured value as a geometry offset value
Geometry offset value = (Absolute coordinate value) - (Measured
value)
Wear offset value = 0
• Entering a measured value as a wear offset value
Geometry offset value = Not changed
Wear offset value = ((Absolute coordinate value) - (Measured
value)) - (Geometry offset value)
6.3.3
Clearing all tool offset data
All currently set tool offset data can be cleared to zero.
Procedure
1. When the [Tool Offset] screen is currently not displayed, follow the
procedure described in Section 6.3, "Tool Offset Settings" to display
the [Tool Offset] screen.
-130-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Tool Offset - Clear] screen appears.
3. Click the <OK> button.
-131-
6. SETTING
6.4
B-62994EN/02
Custom Macro Variable Settings
This section describes how to set a custom macro variable.
WARNING
Incorrect use or setting of a custom macro variable may result in
unpredictable movement of the machine, resulting in damage to the
workpiece, the machine itself, or injury to the operator or bystanders.
Set custom macro variables that are appropriate for the machining
program.
NOTE
When FS15, FS16/18/21, or an NC Board is used, to set a custom
macro variable, the corresponding CNC option is required.
To set a custom macro variable, set the following status:
FS15
l Operation
• Stopped or paused in MDI mode
l Protect key
• Released
FS16, FS18, FS21, Power Mate, NC Board
l Protect key
• Released
To change the CNC operating mode from the software operator's
panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel Settings."
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
-132-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
3. If the [Custom Macro Variables] screen is currently not displayed, press
the chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Custom Macro Variables] screen appears.
4. Choose the desired variable and specify an appropriate value.
Explanation
l Data to be set
• Custom macro variable
1) Local variable
This type of custom macro variable cannot be set on this screen.
2) Common variable 1
This type of custom macro variable can be set on this screen.
The variable setting is cleared when the power is turned off.
3) Common variable 2
This type of custom macro variable can be set on this screen.
The variable setting is retained even after the power is turned off.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
The operation soft keys appear.
-133-
.
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
• Searching for a custom macro variable
To find the desired custom macro variable, press the
soft
key and specify a desired variable number.
• Incremental input
To perform incremental input, press the
soft key.
For an explanation of the other functions, see the description below.
The custom macro common variables can also be input and output by an
external input/output device.
For details, see Section 7.4, "Data Input/Output."
6.4.1
Displaying local variables
Custom macro local variables can be displayed.
The variable numbers range from #1 to #33.
The variables cannot be set on this screen.
Procedure
1. When the [Custom Macro Variables] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.4, "Custom Macro Variable
Settings" to display the [Custom Macro Variables] screen.
-134-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
2. When the local variables are currently not displayed, press the
soft key.
The local variables are displayed on the [Custom Macro Variables]
screen.
-135-
6. SETTING
6.4.2
B-62994EN/02
Common variable 1 settings
Custom macro common variables 1 can be set.
The variable numbers range as indicated below:
FS15
Variable numbers #100 to #199 can be used. The range of variable
numbers that can actually be used varies with the CNC option.
FS16, FS18, FS21, NC Board
Variable numbers #100 to #149 can be used. The range can be expanded
to #100 to #199 by using the corresponding CNC option.
Power Mate
Variable numbers #100 to #199 can be used
Procedure
1. When the [Custom Macro Variables] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.4, "Custom Macro Variable
Settings" to display the [Custom Macro Variables] screen.
2. When common variables 1 are currently not displayed, press the
soft key.
The common variables 1 are displayed on the [Custom Macro
Variables] screen.
-136-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
3. Choose the desired variable and input an appropriate value.
6.4.3
Common variable 2 settings
Custom macro common variables 2 can be set.
The variable numbers range as indicated below:
FS15
Variable numbers #500 to #999 can be used. The range of variable
numbers that can actually be used varies with the CNC option.
FS16, FS18, FS21, NC Board
Variable numbers #500 to #531 can be used. The range can be expanded
to #500 to #999 by using the corresponding CNC option.
Power Mate
Variable numbers #500 to #699 can be used.
Procedure
1. When the [Custom Macro Variables] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.4, "Custom Macro Variable
Settings" to display the [Custom Macro Variables] screen.
-137-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
2. When common variables 2 are currently not displayed, press the
soft key.
The common variables 2 are displayed on the [Custom Macro
Variables] screen.
3. Choose the desired variable and input an appropriate value.
-138-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.4.4
Entering a relative coordinate value as a macro variable
A coordinate value shown on the [Relative Position] screen can be set as the
value of a custom macro variable.
Procedure
1. When the [Custom Macro Variables] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.4, "Custom Macro Variable
Settings" to display the [Custom Macro Variables] screen.
2. Choose the desired variable.
3. Press the
soft key.
The [Custom Macro - C.Input] screen appears.
4. Select the axis corresponding to the relative coordinate value to be set.
Click the <OK> button.
-139-
6. SETTING
6.4.5
B-62994EN/02
Clearing all custom macro variables
All currently specified custom macro variables can be cleared to zero.
Common variables 1 and 2 can be separately cleared.
Procedure
1. When the [Custom Macro Variables] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.4, "Custom Macro Variable
Settings" to display the [Custom Macro Variables] screen.
-140-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Custom Macro - Clear] screen appears.
3. Choose the type of the variables to be cleared.
Click the <OK> button.
-141-
6. SETTING
6.4.6
B-62994EN/02
Setting a blank in a macro variable
A specified custom macro variable can be blank.
Procedure
1. When the [Custom Macro Variables] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.4, "Custom Macro Variable
Settings" to display the [Custom Macro Variables] screen.
2. Choose the custom macro variable to be set to a blank.
soft key.
3. Press the
-142-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.5
Workpiece Origin Offset Settings
This section describes how to set the
WARNING
Setting incorrect workpiece origin offset data may result in
unpredictable movement of the machine, resulting in damage to the
workpiece, the machine itself, or injury to the operator or bystanders.
Set workpiece origin offset data that is appropriate for the machining
program.
NOTE
To set workpiece origin offset data for the FS16/FS18/FS21, the
corresponding CNC option is required.
When the Power Mate is used, workpiece origin offset data cannot be
set.
To set the workpiece origin offset data, set the following status:
l Protect key
• Released
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual provided by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Work Origin Offset] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Work Origin Offset] screen appears.
-143-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
4. Choose the desired data item and specify an appropriate offset value.
Explanation
l Data to be set
• Workpiece origin offset
A workpiece origin offset value is set as the position of the workpiece
origin as viewed from the machine zero point.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
• Searching for workpiece origin offset data
To find the desired workpiece origin offset data, press the
key and specify the desired data number.
• Incremental input
To perform incremental input, press the
key.
For details of the other functions, see the description below.
-144-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.5.1
Entering a measured value as workpiece origin offset data
Workpiece origin offset data can be set based on the current machine
coordinate value and a specified measured value.
The current machine coordinate value minus the specified measured value is
set as the workpiece origin offset data.
Procedure
1. When the [Work Origin Offset] screen is currently not displayed, follow
the procedure described in Section 6.5, "Workpiece Origin Offset
Settings" to display the [Work Origin Offset] screen.
2. Choose the desired workpiece origin offset data item.
3. Press the
soft key.
The [Work Zero Offset - Measure] screen appears.
4. Choose the desired axis.
Input a measured value.
Click the <OK> button.
-145-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Measured value input
The following value is set as the workpiece origin offset value.
Workpiece origin offset value = (Machine coordinate value) (Measured value)
-146-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.6
Tool Life Management Data Settings
This section describes how to set tool life management data.
NOTE
When FS15, FS16/18/21, or an NC Board is used, to set tool life
management data, the corresponding CNC option is required.
When the Power Mate is used, tool life management data cannot be
set.
To set tool life management data, set the following status:
FS15
l Operation
• Stopped or paused in MDI mode
FS16, FS18, FS21, NC Board
l Operation
• Stopped or paused in MDI mode
l Protect key
• Released
To change the CNC operating mode from the software operator's
panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel Settings."
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Tool Life Management] screen is currently not displayed, press
the chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Tool Life Management] screen appears.
-147-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Data to be set
• Selected group
Indicates the number of the tool group for which the life is currently
being counted or was last counted.
• Group in use
Indicates the number of the tool group for which the life is currently
being counted.
• Next group
Indicates the number of the tool group for which the life will be
counted as a result of executing the next M06 command.
• Tool group list
Indicates the life counter value indicating the remaining life of each
tool group and the number of tools belonging to each group.
For details of the setting, see the description below.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
The operation soft keys appear.
-148-
.
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
• Viewing the details or list of the tool life management data
Each time the
or
soft key is pressed, the
displayed tool life management data and soft keys change.
1) Tool group list
In this status, the
and
functions can be
used.
2) Tool group details data
(Sample display for a machining center system)
The screen shows Group No. for the selected tool group, the Life
counter indicating the remaining tool life, Max tools indicating the
maximum number of tools that can be registered, and the life
status of each tool.
In this status, the
,
functions can be used.
-149-
,
, and
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
NOTE
The Add Tool soft key is not displayed for lathe systems.
The Delete Tool soft key is not displayed for FS15 lathe
systems.
• Searching for a tool group
To find the desired tool group, press the
soft key and
specify a desired group number.
For an explanation of the other functions, see the description below.
-150-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.6.1
Adding a tool to a tool group included in the tool life
management data
A tool can be added to a tool group included in the tool life management data.
NOTE
The function for adding a tool is provided only for machining center
systems.
In lathe systems, a program for registering tool information is used to
add a tool to the tool life management data. For an explanation of the
operation and details of the tool registration program, refer to the
operator's manual for the CNC being used.
Procedure
1. When the [Tool Life Management] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.6, "Tool Life Management
Data Settings" to display the [Tool Life Management] screen.
2. Choose the desired tool group.
3. Press the
soft key.
The details of the tool group appear.
-151-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
4. If a tool has already been specified, choose the position where the new
tool is to be added.
The new tool is added immediately after the selected position.
5. Press the
soft key.
The [Tool Life Management - Add Tool] screen appears.
-152-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6. Set the T, H, and D codes.
Click the <OK> button.
The screen shown above indicates that a first tool has been added to tool
group 2.
-153-
6. SETTING
6.6.2
B-62994EN/02
Changing the life status of a tool included in the tool life
management data (for machining center systems)
The life status of a tool included in the tool life management data can be
changed.
The life statuses of all tools belonging to a single group can be changed at the
same time.
NOTE
The life status of a tool can be changed after the tool data has been
included in the tool life management data.
For an explanation of how to add a tool, see Section 6.6.1, "Adding a
tool to a tool group included in the tool life management data."
Procedure
1. When the [Tool Life Management] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.6, "Tool Life Management
Data Settings" to display the [Tool Life Management] screen.
2. Choose the desired group from the list.
3. Press the
soft key.
The details of the tool group appear.
-154-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
4. The details of the tool group appear.
5. Press the
soft key.
The [Tool Life Management - Change S...] screen appears.
-155-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6. Choose the desired tool life status.
To change the life statuses of all tools belonging to the group, check
the All tools box.
Click the <OK> button.
-156-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.6.3
Changing the life status of a tool included in the tool life
management data (for lathe systems)
The life status of a tool included in the tool life management data can be
changed.
NOTE
The life status of a tool can be changed after the tool information
registration program is executed to add the tool data to the tool life
management data.
For details of the tool registration program and program execution,
refer to the operator's manual provided with the CNC being used.
Procedure
1. When the [Tool Life Management] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.6, "Tool Life Management
Data Settings" to display the [Tool Life Management] screen.
2. Choose the desired group from the list.
3. Press the
soft key.
The details of the selected tool group appear.
-157-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
The tool currently selected by the CNC is indicated by an arrow =>.
soft key.
4. Press the
The [Tool Life Management - Change State] screen appears.
5. Click the <OK> button.
The life counter is reset. All tools belonging to the selected group are
set to the Available status.
-158-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.6.4
Setting the life counter data included in the tool life management
data (for machining center systems)
The life counter data included in the tool life management data can be set.
NOTE
The life counter data for a tool can be changed after the tool data has
been included in the tool life management data.
For an explanation of how to add a tool, see Section 6.6.1, "Adding a
tool to a tool group included in the tool life management data."
Procedure
1. When the [Tool Life Management] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.6, "Tool Life Management
Data Settings" to display the [Tool Life Management] screen.
2. Choose the desired group from the list.
3. Press the
soft key.
The [Tool Life Management - Life Counter] screen appears.
-159-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
4. Specify the units for the life counter (Cycle or Minute), life value, and
current count.
Click the <OK> button.
-160-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.6.5
Setting the life counter data included in the tool life management
data (for lathe systems)
The life counter data included in the tool life management data can be set.
NOTE
The life status of a tool can be changed after the tool information
registration program has been executed to add the tool data to the tool
life management data.
The life value (denominator of the life counter value) cannot be
changed on this screen. The tool information registration program
must be executed to change the tool life value.
For details of the tool registration program and program execution,
refer to the operator's manual provided with the CNC being used.
Procedure
1. When the [Tool Life Management] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.6, "Tool Life Management
Data Settings" to display the [Tool Life Management] screen.
2. Choose the desired group from the list.
3. Press the
soft key.
The [Tool Life Management - Life Counter] screen appears.
-161-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
4. Specify the desired life count.
Click the <OK> button.
-162-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.6.6
Deleting a tool from a tool group included in the tool life
management data (for machining center systems)
A tool can be deleted from a tool group included in the tool life management
data.
All the tools constituting a single group can be deleted at the same time.
NOTE
A tool can be deleted after the tool data has been included in the tool
life management data.
For an explanation of how to add a tool, see Section 6.6.1, "Adding a
tool to a tool group included in the tool life management data."
Procedure
1. When the [Tool Life Management] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.6, "Tool Life Management
Data Settings" to display the [Tool Life Management] screen.
2. Choose the desired tool group from the list.
3. Press the
soft key.
The details of the tool group appear.
-163-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
4. Choose the desired tool.
5. Press the
soft key.
The [Tool Life Management - Delete ...] screen appears.
6. To delete a selected tool, check the This tool box.
To delete all tools of the selected group, check the All tools box.
Click the <OK> button.
-164-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.6.7
Deleting a tool from a tool group included in the tool life
management data (for lathe systems)
A tool can be deleted from a tool group included in the tool life management
data.
All the tools constituting a single group are deleted at the same time.
NOTE
The tool deletion procedure described in this section cannot be used
with FS15 lathe systems.
The tool information deletion program must be executed to delete a
tool from the FS15 lathe system.
For details of the tool deletion program and program execution, refer
to the operator's manual provided with the CNC being used.
Procedure
1. When the [Tool Life Management] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.6, "Tool Life Management
Data Settings" to display the [Tool Life Management] screen.
2. Choose the desired tool group from the list.
3. Press the
soft key.
The details of the tool group appear.
-165-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
4. Press the
soft key.
The following message appears.
5. Click the <OK> button.
All tools are deleted from the selected group.
-166-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.7
Software Operator's Panel Settings
This section describes how to set the software operator's panel.
NOTE
When FS15, FS16/18/21, or an NC Board is used, to set the software
operator's panel, the corresponding CNC option is required.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Operator's Panel] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Operator's Panel] screen appears.
-167-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Enabled operation
Any operation that can be executed from the software operator's panel
can be specified.
Whether each operation group is executed from the software operator's
panel or machine operator's panel is specified in the corresponding
parameter.
An operation group for which execution from the machine operator's
panel is specified is not displayed on the software operator's panel.
For details of the parameters, refer to the operator's manual for the CNC
being used.
Group 1: Mode selection
Group 2: Jog feed axis selection, jog rapid traverse
Group 3: Manual pulse generator feed axis selection, manual pulse
magnification selection
Group 4: Jog feedrate, feedrate override, rapid traverse override
Group 5: Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group 6: Protect key
Group 7: Feed hold
l General-purpose switches
Eight user-definable switches are added to the software operator's panel.
Each switch name is specified in a parameter, with up to eight desired
characters.
For details of these parameters, refer to the parameter
description for the CNC being used. For an explanation of the switch
functions, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
-168-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.8
Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Settings
This section describes how to set a workpiece coordinate system shift value.
WARNING
Setting an incorrect workpiece coordinate system shift value may
result in unpredictable movement of the machine, resulting in damage
to the workpiece, the machine itself, or injury to the operator or
bystanders.
Set a workpiece coordinate system shift value that is appropriate for
the machining program.
NOTE
The workpiece coordinate system shift function is supported only by
FS16/18/160/180-TB/TTB/TC/TCC, FS21/210-TB, and
FS16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i-TA.
To set the workpiece coordinate system shift value, establish the
following status:
l Protect key
• Released
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
-169-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
3. If the [Work Shift] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Work Shift] screen appears.
Explanation
• Work Shift screen
To specify a shift value directly, enter the desired value in the Shift value
section.
To specify a shift value indirectly from a measured value, enter a
distance as measured from the zero point of the coordinate system in the
Measurement section. The displacement from the preset zero point of
the coordinate system is calculated, and the shift value is specified
accordingly.
To perform incremental input, press the operation selection key
The following soft keys appear.
-170-
.
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Incremental input can be executed after the
soft key is
pressed.
NOTE
The soft keys indicated above are displayed only when the Work
Shift screen is selected.
l Relative Position screen
For an explanation of the operations, see Section 4.2, "Displaying the
Relative Position."
-171-
6. SETTING
6.9
B-62994EN/02
P-Code Macro Variable Settings
This section describes how to set P-code macro variables.
WARNING
The incorrect use or setting of a P-code macro variable may result in
unpredictable movement of the machine, resulting in damage to the
workpiece, the machine itself, or injury to the operator and/or
bystanders.
Set P-code macro variables that are appropriate for the machining
program.
NOTE
To set a P-code macro variable, the corresponding CNC option is
required.
When the Power Mate-D/H is used, P-code macro variables cannot be
set.
To set a P-code macro variable, set the following status:
FS15
l Operation
• Stopped or paused in MDI mode
l Protect key
• Released
FS16/18/21, Power Mate i-D/H, NC Board
l Protect key
• Released
For details of the settings for displaying P-code macro variables, see
Item 27, "[P-code macro variables] screen" in Appendix 1, "NC
Settings for Each Screen."
To change the CNC operating mode from the software operator's
panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel Settings."
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
-172-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [P-code macro variables] screen is currently not displayed, press
the chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [P-code macro variables] screen appears.
Explanation
l Data to be set
• P-code macro variable
1)Local variable
This type of P-code macro variable cannot be set on this screen.
2)Common variable 1 and common variable 2
These types of P-code macro variable can be set on this screen.
3)P-code variable 1 and P-code variable 2
These types of P-code macro variable can be set on this screen.
-173-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
• Searching for a P-code macro variable
To find the desired P-code macro variable, press the
soft
key and specify a desired variable number.
For an explanation of the other functions, see the description below.
6.9.1
Displaying local variables
P-code macro local variables can be displayed.
The variable numbers range from #1 to #33. The variables cannot be set on
this screen.
Procedure
1. When the [P-code macro variables] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.9, "P-Code Macro Variable
Settings" to display the [P-code macro variables] screen.
2. When the local variables are currently not displayed, press the
soft key.
The local variables are displayed on the [P-code macro variables]
screen.
-174-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.9.2
Common variable 1 settings
P-code macro common variables 1 can be set.
The variable numbers range as indicated below.
FS15
Variable numbers #100 to #199 can be used.
FS16/18/21, Power Mate i-D/H, NC Board
Variable numbers #100 to #149 can be used.
Procedure
1. When the [P-code macro variables] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.9, "P-Code Macro Variable
Settings" to display the [P-code macro variables] screen.
2. When common variables 1 are currently not displayed, press the
soft key.
Common variables 1 are displayed on the [P-code macro variables]
screen.
3. Choose the desired variable and input an appropriate value.
-175-
6. SETTING
6.9.3
B-62994EN/02
Common variable 2 settings
P-code macro common variables 2 can be set.
The variable numbers range as indicated below.
FS15
Variable numbers #500 to #999 can be used.
FS16/18/21, Power Mate i-D/H, NC Board
Variable numbers #500 to #531 can be used.
Procedure
1. When the [P-code macro variables] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.9, "P-Code Macro Variable
Settings" to display the [P-code macro variables] screen.
2. When common variables 2 are currently not displayed, press the
soft key.
Common variables 2 are displayed on the [P-code macro variables]
screen.
3. Choose the desired variable and input an appropriate value.
-176-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.9.4
P-code variable 1 settings
P-code macro P-code variables 1 can be set.
The variable numbers range as indicated below.
FS15
Variable numbers #30000 to #39999 can be used. The range of variable
numbers that can actually be used varies with the CNC option and model.
FS16/18/21, Power Mate i-D/H, NC Board
Variable numbers #10000 to #19999 can be used. The range of variable
numbers that can actually be used varies with the CNC option and model.
Procedure
1. When the [P-code macro variables] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.9, "P-Code Macro Variable
Settings" to display the [P-code macro variables] screen.
2. When P-code variables 1 are currently not displayed, press the
soft key.
P-code variables 1 are displayed on the [P-code macro variables]
screen.
3. Choose the desired variable and input an appropriate value.
-177-
6. SETTING
6.9.5
B-62994EN/02
P-code variable 2 settings
P-code macro P-code variables 2 can be set.
The variable numbers range as indicated below.
FS15
Variable numbers #40000 or greater can be used. The range of variable
numbers that can actually be used varies with the CNC option and model.
FS16/18/21, Power Mate i-D/H, NC Board
Variable numbers #20000 or greater can be used. The range of variable
numbers that can actually be used varies with the CNC option and model.
The variables cannot be used with FS21/210-MB/TB or an NC Board.
Procedure
1. When the [P-code macro variables] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.9, "P-Code Macro Variable
Settings" to display the [P-code macro variables] screen.
2. When P-code variables 2 are currently not displayed, press the
soft key.
P-code variables 2 are displayed on the [P-code macro variables]
screen.
3. Choose the desired variable and input an appropriate value.
-178-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.9.6
Setting a blank in a P-code macro variable
A specified P-code macro variable can be blank.
Procedure
1. When the [P-code macro variables] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure described in Section 6.9, "P-Code Macro Variable
Settings" to display the [P-code macro variables] screen.
2. Choose the P-code macro variable to be set to a blank.
3. Press the
soft key.
-179-
6. SETTING
6.10
B-62994EN/02
Chopping Data Settings
This section describes how to set chopping data.
NOTE
The function for setting chopping data is supported only for machining
center systems.
To set the chopping data, the corresponding CNC option is required.
To set the chopping data, set the following status:
l Protect key
• Released
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Chopping] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Chopping] screen appears.
-180-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Data to be set
A chopping axis, reference point, upper dead point, lower dead point,
and feedrate are specified.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
• Incremental input
To perform incremental input for numeric data input, press the
soft key.
• Absolute coordinate value setting
When the
soft key is pressed in data input for the reference
point, upper dead point, or lower dead point, the absolute coordinate
value on the chopping axis is specified.
-181-
6. SETTING
6.11
B-62994EN/02
Chuck and Tailstock Barrier Settings
This section describes how to set the chuck and tailstock barriers.
NOTE
The function for setting the chuck and tailstock barriers is supported
only for lathe systems.
To set the chuck and tailstock barriers, the corresponding CNC option
is required.
To set the chuck and tailstock barriers, establish the following status:
l Protect key
• Released
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Chuck and Tailstock Barriers] screen is currently not displayed,
press the chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Chuck and Tailstock Barriers] screen appears.
-182-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
• Viewing chuck or tailstock
Each time the
soft key is pressed, the display switches
between chuck and tailstock.
• Viewing chuck holding of inner or outer face
Each time the
soft key is pressed while the chuck data is
being displayed, the display switches between the outer face holding
and inner face holding.
• Incremental input
To perform incremental input for numeric data input, press the
soft key.
-183-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
• Absolute coordinate value setting
When the
soft key is pressed in data input for the chuck
position (CX, CY) or tailstock position (TZ), the absolute coordinate
value on the current data input axis is specified.
l Data to be set
• Chuck barrier
Inner face holding
Outer face holding
L:
Chuck jaw length
W: Chuck jaw width
L1: Chuck jaw gripping length
W1: Chuck jaw gripping width
CX: Chuck jaw position (X-axis)
CZ: Chuck jaw position (Z-axis)
(1) Diameter or radius input can be selected to enter the W, W1, and
CX values, by specifying the corresponding parameter.
For details of the parameters, refer to the parameter description for
the CNC being used.
-184-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
(2) The position on the workpiece coordinate system is set as chuck
positions CX and CZ.
• Tailstock barrier
L:
Tailstock length
D:
Tailstock diameter
L1: Tailstock length 1
D1: Tailstock diameter 1
L2: Tailstock length 2
D2: Tailstock diameter 2
D3: Tailstock hole diameter
TZ: Tailstock position (Z-axis)
(1) Diameter input is executed to input tailstock diameters D, D1, D2,
and D3.
(2) The position on the workpiece coordinate system is set as tailstock
position TZ.
CAUTION
An incorrect chuck or tailstock barrier setting may disable the entrydehibition area.
The following settings are incorrect:
• Chuck: L < L1 or W < W1
• Tailstock: D2 < D3
• Overlapping chuck and tailstock positions
-185-
6. SETTING
6.12
B-62994EN/02
B-Axis Tool Offset Settings
This section describes how to set B-axis tool offset data.
WARNING
An invalid tool offset setting may result in unpredictable movement of
the machine, resulting in damage to the workpiece, the machine itself,
or injury to the operator and/or bystanders.
Set an appropriate tool offset value for the machining program.
NOTE
B-axis tool offset data can be set only when FS16/18/160/180TB/TTB/TC/TTC or FS16i/18i/160i/180i-TA is used.
To set the B-axis tool offset data, the corresponding CNC option is
required.
To set the B-axis tool offset data, set the following status:
l Protect key
• Released
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Tool Offset (B-Axis)] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Tool Offset (B-Axis)] screen appears.
-186-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
When the tool geometry and wear compensation options are provided
l Displayed settings
• Offset number
Tool offset auxiliary function number
• Wear
Tool wear compensation
• Geometry
Tool geometry compensation
l Operation
To set tool wear and geometry compensation data, use the arrow keys to
position the cursor to a desired item. Then, input a value and press the
[Enter] key.
-187-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
When the tool geometry and wear compensation options are not provided
l Displayed settings
• Offset number
Tool offset auxiliary function number
• Data
Tool compensation
l Operation
To set tool compensation data, use the arrow keys to position the cursor
to a desired item. Then, input a value and press the [Enter] key.
NOTE
To display the B-axis operation status, see Section 5.8, "Displaying
the B-Axis Operating Status."
-188-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
6.13
Tool Post Interference Check Settings
This section describes how to set tool post interference check data.
NOTE
Tool
post
interference
check
data
can
be
set
only
when
FS16/18/160/180-TTB/TTC, FS16i/18i/160i/180i-T (with the 2-path
control function), or FS15/150-TTB is used.
To set the tool post interference check data, the corresponding CNC
option is required.
To set the tool post interference check data, set the following status:
l Protect key
• Released
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Tool Post Interference Check] screen is currently not displayed,
press the chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Tool Post Interference Check] screen appears.
-189-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
On this screen, set contact-forbidden area data to perform tool post
interference checks.
l Displayed settings
• Interference check status
When all the requirements for tool post interference checks are
satisfied, the "Execution of the interference check" button lights;
otherwise, the "Stop of the interference check" button lights.
• Contact-forbidden area data
Set contact-forbidden areas based on the tool post contour, such as
areas 1 and 2 on the right on the screen.
Use the arrow keys or mouse to select a desired item. Then, input a
value and press the [Enter] key.
For a contact-forbidden area, the following must be satisfied:
X > I, Z > K
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
The operation soft keys appear.
-190-
.
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
• Calling contact-forbidden area data
Press the
soft key to call the contact-forbidden area data.
• Incremental input of contact-forbidden area data
Press the
numeric data.
-191-
soft key to perform the incremental input of
6. SETTING
6.14
B-62994EN/02
2-Path Interference Check Settings
This section describes how to set 2-path interference check data.
NOTE
2-path interference check data can be set only when FS16/160MMB/MMC or FS16i/160i-M (with the 2-path control function) is used.
To set the 2-path interference check data, the corresponding CNC
option is required.
To set the 2-path interference check data, set the following status:
l Protect key
• Released
For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [2 Paths Interference Check] screen is currently not displayed,
press the chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [2 Paths Interference Check] screen appears.
-192-
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
On this screen, set interference-forbidden area data to perform 2-path
interference checks.
l Displayed settings
• Interference check status
When all the requirements for 2-path interference checks are
satisfied, the "Execution of the interference check" button lights;
otherwise, the "Stop of the interference check" button lights.
• Interference-forbidden area data
Set interference-forbidden areas. Use the arrow keys or mouse to
select a desired item. Then, input a value and press the [Enter] key.
For an interference-forbidden area, the following must be satisfied:
X > I, Y > J, Z > K
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
• Incremental input of interference-forbidden area data
Press the
-193-
soft key to perform incremental input.
6. SETTING
B-62994EN/02
NOTE
When an interference-forbidden area is reset, the 2-path interference
check start signal TISTR <G063#4> must be set to 0, then back to 1.
-194-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7
SYSTEM
This chapter describes how to display and set system-related information, and
how to input and output different types of data.
-195-
7. SYSTEM
7.1
B-62994EN/02
Setting Parameters
This section describes how to display and set those parameters that determine
the specifications and functions of the machine.
NOTE
To set parameters, establish the following status:
l Setting data
• Enable Parameter Write.
l Operation
Set either of the following statuses:
• Emergency stop
• Stopped or paused in MDI mode
For an explanation of how to specify the setting data, see Section 6.1,
"Setting Data." To change the CNC operating mode from the software
operator's panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel
Settings."
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Parameter] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection key
4. If the
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key.
The [Parameter] screen is displayed.
-196-
soft key is displayed.
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Operation soft keys
For parameter search and incremental input, press the operation selection
key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
• Parameter search
To find the desired parameter, press the
soft key, then
specify the parameter number.
• Incremental input
In numeric value input operation, incremental input is enabled by
pressing the
soft key.
l Parameter functions
A bit parameter is set when its check box is checked.
The function of each parameter varies from one machine to another. So,
refer to the parameter list prepared by the machine tool builder.
-197-
7. SYSTEM
7.2
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the Diagnosis Screen
This section describes how to display the diagnosis screen.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Diagnosis] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection key
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
4. If the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key.
The [Diagnosis] screen is displayed.
-198-
soft key is displayed.
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Diagnosis screen
The diagnosis items and their statuses are displayed.
To find the desired diagnosis data item, press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
To find the desired diagnosis data item, press the
then specify the data number.
-199-
soft key,
7. SYSTEM
7.3
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the System Configuration
This section describes how to display the system configuration.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [System Configuration] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
4. If the
soft key until the
soft key is displayed.
soft key.
Press the
The [System Configuration] screen is displayed.
-200-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l System configuration
• Slot
Slot numbers, module IDs, series numbers, and version numbers are
displayed.
• Software
Information about the system control software and added software
products is displayed.
• Module
Information about mounted modules is displayed for each board.
l Operation soft keys
To output the system configuration data to a file, press the operation
selection key
. The following soft key appears.
For details of the function, see the description below.
7.3.1
Outputting the system configuration data to a file
This section describes how to output the system configuration data to a file.
Procedure
1. If the [System Configuration] screen is currently not displayed, display
the [System Configuration] screen as explained in Section 7.3,
"Displaying the System Configuration."
-201-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The [System Configuration - Write to Disk] screen appears.
3. Specify the desired settings for [Save in:] and [File name:], then click
the <Save> button.
Explanation
l The system configuration data displayed on the [System Configuration]
screen is saved in text format.
l The data can be output only to a disk.
-202-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.4
Data Input/Output
This section describes how to input and output different types of data.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection key
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
4. If the
soft key until the
soft key.
Press the
The [Data I/O] screen is displayed.
-203-
soft key is displayed.
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Data input/output
The currently selected input/output setting item (device), channel, data
input status, and remaining amount of free space (in bytes) at the
connection destination are displayed. On the right side of the screen, a
list of the data files of the connection destination is displayed, for
example, by pressing the [Directory] soft key.
The following items of data can be input and output:
• Programs
• Tool offset data
• Custom macro variables (common variables only)
• Parameters
• Pitch error compensation data
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
For details of each function, see the description below.
7.4.1
Setting parameters for input/output
This section describes how to set the parameters for the input/output of
different types of data.
Procedure
1. If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the [Data I/O]
screen as explained in Section 7.4, "Data Input/Output."
-204-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
2. Select a device to be set.
For the selected device, set the channel to be connected, device type,
and so forth.
3. Press the
soft key.
The [Data I/O - Setting] screen is displayed.
4. Set data. For details of each item, see the description below.
Click the <OK> button.
-205-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Channel
Select a channel to be connected. The user can choose from the channels
below.
• Disk
Select this channel to make a connection with a disk (such as a hard
disk) on the personal computer.
• COM1, COM2
Select COM1 or COM2 to make a connection with the RS-232C port
of the personal computer. The CNC port cannot be used.
l Serial port
If the channel is for connection with a serial port, set the data items
below.
• Device type
Set the type of communication device.
A connection can be made with the following communication devices:
Dumb terminal
Serial interface tape reader
Portable tape reader
FANUC PPR
FANUC Cassette
FANUC Floppy Disk
FANUC Handy File
FANUC Program File Mate
• Baud rate
Set a communication speed.
• Stop bit
Set a space between characters in communication.
• Parity bit
Set whether to use a parity bit to be added to data packets for transfer
error detection.
• Data bit
Set the number of bits for single-character data packets.
-206-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
• Flow control
Set the control method to be applied once the communication buffer is
full.
l Folder
When the channel is used for connection with a disk, set the data items
below.
• Path
Set the path of the data file used for input/output. To change the path,
click the
button to select a new path.
• File type
Set the type of file to be used for input/output. To make a more
detailed file type specification, select "Extension," then specify the
desired extension.
l I/O data
• Input code
Set a character code system to be used for data input.
• Output code
Set a character code system to be used for data output.
• EOB code
Set a type of EOB code.
• Feed output
For output onto paper tape, feed codes can be output. Check this item
to output feed codes.
• TV check
A space code can be inserted into a data block for the TV check.
Check this item to enable the inserting of space for the TV check.
• CTV
This item is enabled when the TV check item is turned on.
checking this item, a TV check in a comment can be cancelled.
-207-
By
7. SYSTEM
7.4.2
B-62994EN/02
Displaying lists of various data files
This section describes how to display lists of data files.
Procedure
1. If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the [Data I/O]
screen as explained in Section 7.4 "Data Input/Output."
2. If parameters for data input/output are not set, set the required
parameters.
For information about setting, see Section 7.4.1, "Setting parameters for
input/output."
3. Select a device to be subject to listing, as required.
soft key.
4. Press the
-208-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
A list of data files is displayed.
If the communication device is not connected correctly, for example, an
error message is displayed.
In such a case, check the settings for
communication, cable connection, power supply for the communication
device, and so forth.
NOTE
If the RS-232C interface is used for input/output device connection,
list display will be slower than that for disk input/output.
-209-
7. SYSTEM
7.4.3
B-62994EN/02
Entering different types of data
This section describes how to input different types of data. Here, data input
means transferring data from Basic Operation Package 1 to the CNC.
WARNING
l When a workpiece is to be machined after input of data (programs,
tool offset data, macro variables, and parameters), be sure to check
that the programmed values, offset data, current position, and
external signals are set correctly before activating the machine.
l If an error is made in the input data type (for example, macro
variable data is entered as parameter data), the subsequent
operation will be unpredictable. If an error is made in the input data
type, delete all the data entered at that time, then reenter all the
required data.
NOTE
To enter data, establish the same state as that used for manually
setting input data.
For details, see the following sections:
l Program input
Section 5.1, "Editing a Program"
l Tool offset input
Section 6.3, "Tool Offset Settings"
l Macro variable input
Section 6.4, "Custom Macro Variable Settings"
l Parameter output
Section 7.1, "Setting Parameters"
l Pitch error compensation data input
Section 7.5, "Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data"
The Power Mate-D does not support the input of pitch error
compensation data.
-210-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
(1) When the input device is a disk
Procedure
1. If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the [Data I/O]
screen as explained in Section 7.4 "Data Input/Output."
2. If the parameters for data input/output have not yet been set, set the
required parameters.
For an explanation about how to make this setting, see Section 7.4.1,
"Setting parameters for input/output."
3. Check that Disk is selected for Channel. If Disk is not selected, select
Disk for the input device to be used.
4. Press the
soft key.
The [Data I/O - Read] screen is displayed.
-211-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
5. Specify a data file to be input.
Click the <Open> button.
The [Data I/O - Read] screen is displayed.
6. Select an input data type from the following:
• Program
• Tool offset data
• Custom macro variable
• Parameter
• Pitch error compensation data
When a program is selected as an input data type, a new program
number can also be specified for the program.
Match the type of data selected here with the contents of the file
selected in step 5, above.
7. Click the <OK> button.
The [Data I/O] screen is displayed and data input is executed.
(Example of Screen for Tool Offset Data Input)
-212-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
WARNING
If the user clicks the <Cancel> button while data is being
entered, incomplete data will exist in the CNC. If the machine is
operated with such incomplete data, the operation of the
machine may be unpredictable, resulting in damage to the
workpiece, the machine itself, or injury to the operator or
bystanders.
Never cancel data input before all the data has been entered. If
data input is cancelled before the completion of data input, all
the data must be entered again, starting from the beginning.
Thus, ensure that the data is input correctly.
8. Click the <OK> button.
NOTE
l When the parameters output from a CNC are to be entered into
another CNC, the number of axes and option selection states of the
CNC that receives the parameters must match those of the CNC
from which the parameters are output.
For an explanation of the CNC parameter for the number of axes,
refer to the relevant manual provided with each CNC.
For an
explanation of how to set the CNC parameter for the number of
axes, see Section 7.1, "Setting Parameters."
l Some CNC parameters are protected. Such parameters cannot be
modified using this screen. Use the parameter setting screen.
For an explanation of how to set the parameters, see Section 7.1,
"Setting Parameters."
-213-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
(2) When the input device is a Dumb terminal, serial interface tape reader,
portable tape reader, or FANUC PPR
Procedure
1. If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the [Data I/O]
screen as explained in Section 7.4 "Data Input/Output."
2. If the parameters for data input/output have not yet been set, set the
required parameters.
For an explanation of how to make this setting, see Section 7.4.1,
"Setting parameters for input/output."
3. Check that COM1 or COM2 is selected for Channel. If neither COM1
nor COM2 is selected, select COM1 or COM2, as required, for the
input device to be used.
4. If the input device is a serial interface tape reader, portable tape reader,
or FANUC PPR, load paper tape into the device.
5. Press the
soft key.
The [Data I/O - Read] screen is displayed.
-214-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
6. Select the input data type from the following:
• Program
• Tool offset data
• Custom macro variable
• Parameter
• Pitch error compensation data
When a program is selected as an input data type, a new program
number can also be specified for the program.
Click the <OK> button.
If the input device is a serial interface tape reader, portable tape reader,
or FANUC PPR, the [Data I/O] screen is displayed and data input is
executed.
7. If the input device is a Dumb terminal, data transmission operation is to
be performed on the Dumb terminal.
Data input is executed.
(Example of Screen for Tool Offset Data Input)
WARNING
If the user clicks the <Cancel> button while data is being entered,
incomplete data will exist in the CNC. If the machine is operated
with such incomplete data, the operation of the machine may be
unpredictable, resulting in damage to the workpiece, the machine
itself, or injury to the operator or bystanders.
Never cancel data input before all the data has been entered. If
data input is cancelled before the completion of data input, all the
data must be entered again, starting from the beginning. Thus,
ensure that the data is input correctly.
-215-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
8. Click the <OK> button.
NOTE
l When the parameters output from a CNC are to be entered into
another CNC, the number of axes and option selection states of the
CNC that receives the parameters must match those of the CNC
from which the parameters are output.
For an explanation of the CNC parameter for the number of axes,
refer to the relevant manual provided with each CNC.
For an
explanation of how to set the CNC parameter for the number of
axes, see Section 7.1, "Setting Parameters."
l Some CNC parameters are protected. Such parameters cannot be
modified using this screen. Use the parameter setting screen.
For an explanation of how to perform parameter setting, see Section
7.1, "Setting Parameters."
-216-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
(3) When the input device is a FANUC Cassette, FANUC Floppy Cassette,
FANUC Handy File, or FANUC Program File Mate
Procedure
1. If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the [Data I/O]
screen as explained in Section 7.4 "Data Input/Output."
2. If parameters for data input/output are not set, set the required
parameters.
For information about setting, see Section 7.4.1, "Setting parameters for
input/output."
3. Check that COM1 or COM2 is selected for Channel. If neither COM1
nor COM2 is selected, select COM1 or COM2, as required, for the
input device to be used.
4. To check the input source file, press the
soft key.
A file list is displayed.
If the communication device is not connected correctly, for example, an
error message is displayed. In such a case, check the communication
settings, the cable connection, power supply for the communication
device, and so forth.
5. Press the
soft key.
The [Data I/O - Read] screen is displayed.
-217-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
6. Select the input data type from the following:
• Program
• Tool offset data
• Custom macro variable
• Parameter
• Pitch error compensation data
When a program is selected as an input data type, a new program
number can also be specified for the program.
Specify the number or name of the input data file. However, when the
input device is a FANUC Cassette, no file name can be specified.
Click the <OK> button.
7. The [Data I/O] screen is displayed and data input is executed.
(Example of Screen for Tool Offset Data Input)
-218-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
WARNING
If the user clicks the <Cancel> button while data is being
entered, incomplete data will exist in the CNC. If the machine is
operated with such incomplete data, the operation of the
machine may be unpredictable, resulting in damage to the
workpiece, the machine itself, or injury to the operator or
bystanders.
Never cancel data input before all the data has been entered. If
data input is cancelled before the completion of data input, all
the data must be entered again, starting from the beginning.
Thus, ensure that the data is input correctly.
8. Click the <OK> button.
NOTE
l When the parameters output from a CNC are to be entered into
another CNC, the number of axes and option selection states of the
CNC that receives the parameters must match those of the CNC
from which the parameters are output.
For an explanation of the CNC parameter for the number of axes,
refer to the relevant manual provided with each CNC.
For an
explanation of how to set the CNC parameter for the number of
axes, see Section 7.1, "Setting Parameters."
l Some CNC parameters are protected. Such parameters cannot be
modified using this screen. Use the parameter setting screen.
For an explanation of how to set the parameters, see Section 7.1,
"Setting Parameters."
-219-
7. SYSTEM
7.4.4
B-62994EN/02
Outputting different types of data
This section describes how to output different types of data.
Here, data output means transferring data from the CNC to Basic Operation
Package 1.
NOTE
The Power Mate-D does not support the output of pitch error
compensation data.
(1) When the output device is a disk
Procedure
1. If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the [Data I/O]
screen as explained in Section 7.4 "Data Input/Output."
2. If the parameters for data input/output have not yet been set, set the
required parameters.
For an explanation about how to make this setting, see Section 7.4.1,
"Setting parameters for input/output."
3. Check that Disk is selected for Channel. If Disk is not selected, select
Disk for the output device to be used.
4. Press the
soft key.
The [Data I/O - Punch] screen is displayed.
-220-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
5. Enter an output file name. It is recommended that a file name from
which the type of data to be output can be easily determined be
specified.
Click the <Save> button.
The [Data I/O - Punch] screen is displayed.
6. Select the output data type from the following:
• Program
• Tool offset data
• Custom macro variable
• Parameter
• Pitch error compensation data
When a program is selected as an output data type, also specify an
output program start number.
Multiple programs can be output by specifying an output program start
number and end number.
Click the <OK> button.
The [Data I/O] screen is displayed and data output is executed.
-221-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
(Example of Screen for Custom Macro Variable Data Output)
WARNING
If the user clicks the <Cancel> button while data is being output,
a data file containing incomplete output data will be created. If
the machine is operated with such incomplete data which is
again entered by data input function, the operation of the
machine may be unpredictable, resulting in damage to the
workpiece or the machine itself, or injury to the operator or
bystanders.
Therefore, delete any data file that contains
incomplete output data.
NOTE
If a specified output file name already exists at the output
destination, the data in the existing file is replaced with the new
data.
7. Click the <OK> button.
-222-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
(2) When the output device is a Dumb terminal, serial interface tape reader,
portable tape reader, or FANUC PPR
Procedure
1. If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the [Data I/O]
screen as explained in Section 7.4 "Data Input/Output."
2. If the parameters for data input/output have not yet been set, set the
required parameters.
For an explanation of how to make this setting, see Section 7.4.1,
"Setting parameters for input/output."
3. Check that COM1 or COM2 is selected for Channel. If neither COM1
nor COM2 is selected, select COM1 or COM2, as required, for the
output device to be used.
4. Press the
soft key.
The [Data I/O - Punch] screen is displayed.
If the communication device is not connected correctly, for example, an
error message is displayed. In such a case, check the communication
settings, the cable connection, power supply for the communication
device, and so forth.
-223-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
5. Select the output data type from the following:
• Program
• Tool offset data
• Custom macro variable
• Parameter
• Pitch error compensation data
When a program is selected as an output data type, also specify an
output program start number.
Multiple programs can be output by specifying an output program start
number and end number.
Click the <OK> button.
The [Data I/O] screen is displayed and output is executed.
(Example of Screen for Custom Macro Variable Data Output)
-224-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
WARNING
If the user clicks the <Cancel> button while data is being output,
a data file containing incomplete output data will be created. If
the machine is operated with such incomplete data which is
again entered by data input function, the operation of the
machine may be unpredictable, resulting in damage to the
workpiece or the machine itself, or injury to the operator or
bystanders.
Therefore, delete any data file that contains
incomplete output data.
6. Click the <OK> button.
-225-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
(3) When the output device is a FANUC Cassette, FANUC Floppy Cassette,
FANUC Handy File, or FANUC Program File Mate
Procedure
1. If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the [Data I/O]
screen as explained in Section 7.4 "Data Input/Output."
2. If the parameters for data input/output have not yet been set, set the
required parameters.
For an explanation of how to make this setting, see Section 7.4.1,
"Setting parameters for input/output."
3. Check that COM1 or COM2 is selected for Channel. If neither COM1
nor COM2 is selected, select COM1 or COM2, as required, for the
output device to be used.
4. To check the output destination file, press the
soft key.
A file list is displayed.
If the communication device is not connected correctly, for example, an
error message is displayed. In such a case, check the communication
settings, the cable connection, power supply for the communication
device, and so forth.
5. Press the
soft key.
The [Data I/O - Punch] screen is displayed.
If the communication device is not connected correctly, for example, an
error message is displayed. In such a case, check the communication
settings, the cable connection, power supply for the communication
device, and so forth.
-226-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
6. Select the output data type from the following:
• Program
• Tool offset data
• Custom macro variable
• Parameter
• Pitch error compensation data
When a program is selected as an output data type, also specify an
output program start number. Multiple programs can be output by
specifying an output program start number and end number.
Next, specify the number and name of the output data file. Note that
when the output device is a FANUC Cassette, no file name can be
specified.
Click the <OK> button.
The [Data I/O] screen is displayed and data output is executed.
(Example of Screen for Custom Macro Variable Data Output)
-227-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
WARNING
If the user clicks the <Cancel> button while data is being output,
a data file containing incomplete output data will be created. If
the machine is operated with such incomplete data which is
again entered by data input function, the operation of the
machine may be unpredictable, resulting in damage to the
workpiece or the machine itself, or injury to the operator or
bystanders.
Therefore, delete any data file that contains
incomplete output data.
NOTE
If a specified output file number and file name already exist at
the output destination, the data in the existing file is replaced
with the new data.
7. Click the <OK> button.
-228-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.4.5
Deleting data files
This section describes how to delete different types of data files.
Procedure
1. If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the [Data I/O]
screen as explained in Section 7.4 "Data Input/Output."
2. If the parameters for data input/output have not yet been set, set the
required parameters.
For information about setting, see Section 7.4.1, "Setting parameters for
input/output."
3. Select a device for deleting files as required.
soft key.
4. Press the
A data file list is displayed.
If the communication device is not connected correctly, for example, an
error message is displayed. In such a case, check the communication
settings, the cable connection, power supply for the communication
device, and so forth.
5. From the list, select a file to be deleted.
Multiple files can be also selected.
-229-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
6. Press the
soft key.
The [Data I/O - Delete] screen is displayed.
7. Click the <OK> button.
If the specified file is not deleted as shown above, and an error message
is displayed retry as explained in the message.
-230-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.4.6
Renaming different types of data files
This section describes how to rename different types of data files.
Procedure
1. If the [Data I/O] screen is currently not displayed, display the [Data I/O]
screen as explained in Section 7.4 "Data Input/Output."
2. If the parameters for data input/output have not yet been set, set the
required parameters.
For an explanation of how to make this setting, see Section 7.4.1,
"Setting parameters for input/output."
3. Select a device for renaming a file as required.
soft key.
4. Press the
A data file list is displayed.
If the communication device is not connected correctly, for example, an
error message is displayed. In such a case, check the communication
settings, the cable connection, power supply for the communication
device, and so forth.
5. From the list, select a file to be renamed.
-231-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
6. Press the
soft key.
The [Data I/O - Rename] screen is displayed.
7. Specify a new name.
Click the <OK> button.
If the specified file is not renamed as shown above, and an error message
is displayed retry as explained in the message.
-232-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.5
Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data
This section describes how to set pitch error compensation data.
CAUTION
Pitch error compensation data is set to match the characteristics of
the machine connected to the CNC. The pitch error compensation
data varies with the machine; modifying this data may degrade the
precision of the machine. In general, the end user must not attempt to
modify the pitch error compensation data.
NOTE
The Power Mate-D/H and Power Mate i-H do not support the setting of
pitch error compensation data.
To set pitch error compensation data, establish the following status:
l Setting data
• Enable Parameter Write.
l Operation
• Emergency stop
For an explanation of how to specify the setting data, see Section 6.1,
"Setting Data."
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Pitch Error Compensation] screen is currently not displayed,
press the chapter selection key
-233-
.
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
4. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
soft key until the
soft key is displayed.
soft key.
Press the
The [Pitch Error Compensation] screen is displayed.
5. Select the data items to be set, then set compensation values.
Explanation
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
To find the desired pitch error compensation data, press the
soft key, then specify the data number.
-234-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Pitch error compensation data can be input and output using an external
input/output device.
For details, see Section 7.4, "Data Input/Output."
7.6
Setting Servo Setting Data
This section describes how to set servo setting data.
CAUTION
Servo setting data is set to match the characteristics of the machine
connected to the CNC.
The servo setting data varies with the
machine; modifying this data may disable the operation of the
machine, or degrade the precision of the machine. In general, the end
user must not attempt to modify the servo setting data.
Procedure
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
1. If the
selection key
.
soft key.
2. Press the
3. If the [Servo Setting] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection key
4. If the
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key.
The [Servo Setting] screen is displayed.
-235-
soft key is displayed.
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
5. Set data as required.
Explanation
l Servo setting data
For details of each item, refer to the maintenance manual provided with
the CNC.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
In numeric value input, incremental input is enabled by pressing the
key.
-236-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.7
Setting Servo Tuning Data
This section describes how to set servo tuning data.
CAUTION
Servo tuning data is set to match the characteristics of the machine
connected to the CNC.
The servo tuning data varies with the
machine; modifying this data may disable the operation of the
machine, or degrade the precision of the machine. In general, the end
user must not attempt to modify the servo tuning data.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Servo Tuning] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection key
4. If the
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key.
The [Servo Tuning] screen is displayed.
-237-
soft key is displayed.
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
5. Set data as required.
Explanation
l Servo tuning data
For details of each item, refer to the maintenance manual provided with
the CNC.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
In numeric value input, incremental input is enabled by pressing the
key.
-238-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.8
Setting Spindle Setting Data
This section describes how to set spindle setting data.
CAUTION
Spindle setting data is set to match the characteristics of the machine
connected to the CNC.
The spindle setting data varies with the
machine; modifying this data may disable the operation of the
machine, or degrade the precision of the machine. In general, the end
user must not attempt to modify the spindle setting data.
NOTE
To set spindle setting data, the respective CNC option is required.
The Power Mate-D/H and Power Mate i-H do not support the setting of
spindle setting data.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Spindle Setting] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
4. If the
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key is displayed.
soft key.
The [Spindle Setting] screen is displayed.
-239-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
5. Set data as required.
Explanation
l Spindle setting data
For details of each item, refer to the maintenance manual provided with
the CNC.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
In numeric value input, incremental input is enabled by pressing the
key.
-240-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.9
Setting Spindle Tuning Data
This section describes how to set spindle tuning data.
CAUTION
Spindle tuning data is set to match the characteristics of the machine
connected to the CNC.
The spindle tuning data varies with the
machine; modifying this the data may disable the operation of the
machine, or degrade the precision of the machine. In general, the end
user must not attempt to modify the spindle tuning data.
NOTE
To set spindle tuning data, the respective CNC option is required.
The Power Mate-D/H and Power Mate i-H do not support the setting of
spindle tuning data.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Spindle Tuning] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
4. If the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key is displayed.
soft key.
The [Spindle Tuning] screen is displayed.
-241-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
5. Set data as required.
Explanation
l Spindle setting data
For details of each item, refer to the maintenance manual provided with
the CNC.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
In numeric value input, incremental input is enabled by pressing the
key.
-242-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.10
Collecting Waveform Diagnosis Data
This section describes how to set data for waveform diagnosis, and how to
collect waveform diagnosis sampling data.
NOTE
The Power Mate does not support this function.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Wave Diagnosis Setting] screen is currently not displayed, press
the chapter selection key
4. If the
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key is displayed.
soft key.
The [Wave Diagnosis Setting] screen is displayed.
-243-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Waveform diagnosis setting
Data for waveform diagnosis can be set, and waveform diagnosis
sampling data can be collected.
For details of each item displayed on the screen, see Section 7.10.1,
"Setting data for waveform diagnosis."
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
For details of each function, see the description below.
-244-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.10.1
Setting data for waveform diagnosis
This section describes how to set data for waveform diagnosis.
Procedure
1. If the [Wave Diagnosis Setting] screen is currently not displayed,
display the [Wave Diagnosis Setting] screen as explained in Section
7.10 "Collecting Waveform Diagnosis Data."
2. Set the following data items as required:
l Sampling type
l Start condition/end condition
l Trigger signal
l Sampling time/delay time
For details of the setting data, see the description in Explanation below.
3. Select sampling data from the list as required.
4. Press the
soft key.
The sampling data setting screen appears.
For sampling data other than machine signals, set the type of sampling
data, enable/disable, and so forth.
-245-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
For machine signal sampling data, set enable/disable and a signal
address.
-246-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Sampling type
Specify the type of sampling data.
• One-shot type
Changes in the types of data listed below can be displayed as
waveforms.
(1) Error value, number of distributed pulses, torque, feedrate,
current, and thermal simulation data for the servo motor along
each axis
(2) Combined feedrate along each axis
(3) Spindle motor speed, load meter reading, and position deviation,
converted to spindle position
(4) On/off of the machine signal specified by signal address
• Servo alarm type
Changes in the data below can be memorized, and can be displayed
as a waveform when a servo alarm is detected.
(1) Error value, number of distributed pulses, torque, feedrate,
current, and thermal simulation data for the servo motor along
each axis
-247-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
l Start condition/end condition
For the one-shot type, specify a sampling start condition.
• Start
Sampling is started by pressing the
soft key.
• Start and trigger up
Sampling is started by pressing the
soft key, then turning
on the signal specified with Trigger signal.
• Start and trigger down
Sampling is started by pressing the
soft key, then turning
off the signal specified with Trigger signal.
For the servo alarm type, specify a sampling end condition.
⋅ Servo alarm
Sampling is terminated upon the detection of a servo alarm.
• Servo alarm or trigger up
Sampling is terminated upon the detection of a servo alarm or by
turning on the signal specified with Trigger signal.
• Servo alarm or trigger down
Sampling is terminated upon the detection of a servo alarm or by
turning off the signal specified with Trigger signal.
l Trigger signal
When the start condition/end condition is "trigger up" or "trigger
down," specify the PMC address and bit of the signal used as the
trigger, for example, as follows:
G0007.2
For information about the PMC addresses and bits of signals, refer to
the address table in the connection manual (BMI interface) provided
with the CNC.
l Sampling time/delay time
Specify a sampling time (for the one-shot type) or delay (for the servo
alarm type) in milliseconds.
-248-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
l Sampling data list
• For other than the machine signals
Specify a sampling data type and axis name. For details, refer to the
maintenance manual provided with the CNC.
• Machine signal
Specify the PMC address and bit of a signal to be sampled, for
example, as follows:
G0007.2
For information about the PMC addresses and bits of signals, refer
to the address table in the connection manual (BMI interface)
provided with the CNC.
-249-
7. SYSTEM
7.10.2
B-62994EN/02
Collecting waveform diagnosis sampling data
This section explains how to collect waveform diagnosis sampling data.
NOTE
Before waveform diagnosis sampling data can be collected, the
settings required for waveform diagnosis must be made.
For
information about the settings required for waveform diagnosis, see
Section 7.10.1, "Setting data for waveform diagnosis."
Procedure
1. If the [Wave Diagnosis Setting] screen is currently not displayed,
display the [Wave Diagnosis Setting] screen as explained in Section
7.10 "Collecting Waveform Diagnosis Data."
2. If the settings for waveform diagnosis are not made, make the settings
as explained in Section 7.10.1, "Setting data for waveform diagnosis."
-250-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
3. Press the
soft key.
For the one-shot type, turn on/off the trigger signal according to the start
condition.
Sampling is started.
4. For the one-shot type, sampling is performed for a specified sampling
time.
For the servo alarm type, sampling is performed until a servo alarm is
detected or the trigger signal specified as the end condition is turned
on/off.
To terminate sampling prior to its completion, press the
key.
-251-
soft
7. SYSTEM
7.11
B-62994EN/02
Displaying Waveform Diagnosis Graphs
This section describes how to display waveform diagnosis graphs.
NOTE
Before waveform diagnosis graphs can be displayed, waveform
diagnosis sampling data must be collected.
For the method of
collecting waveform diagnosis sampling data, see Section 7.10,
"Collecting Waveform Diagnosis Data."
The Power Mate does not support this function.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Wave Diagnosis Graph] screen is currently not displayed, press
the chapter selection key
4. If the
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key is displayed.
soft key.
The [Wave Diagnosis Graph] screen is displayed.
-252-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Waveform diagnosis graph
A waveform diagnosis graph is displayed.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
• Waveform display switching
By pressing the
soft key, the user can cyclically switch
between waveform 1 and waveform 2 as the waveform that can be
manipulated with the
and
soft keys.
The
currently displayed waveform is waveform 1 or waveform 2 with its
indication preceded by a colored circle.
• Doubling waveform diagnosis graph
By pressing the
soft key, an doubled waveform can be
displayed. Note, however, that this enlargement function cannot be
used with one-shot type waveforms.
-253-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
• Halving a waveform diagnosis graph
By pressing the
soft key, a halved waveform can be
displayed. Note, however, that this shrinking function cannot be used
with one-shot type waveforms.
-254-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
• Making the time axis more precise for a waveform diagnosis graph
By pressing the
soft key, the time axis for waveform
display can be made more precise by a factor of 2.
-255-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
• Making the time axis less precise for a waveform diagnosis graph
By pressing the
soft key, the time axis for waveform
display can be made less precise by a factor of 2.
For other functions, see the description below.
-256-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.11.1
Selecting the waveform diagnosis data to be displayed
This section describes how to select the waveform diagnosis data to be
displayed. Waveform diagnosis data stored in a file can also be selected.
Procedure
1. If the [Wave Diagnosis Graph] screen is currently not displayed, display
the [Wave Diagnosis Graph] screen according to Section 7.11
"Displaying Waveform Diagnosis Graphs."
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Wave Diagnosis(Graph) - Select] screen is displayed.
3. Select the waveform data to be displayed.
If waveform data is selected from the displayed list, the selected
waveform is displayed.
To display the waveform data stored in a file, select File.
Here, File is selected.
Then, the [Wave Diagnosis(Graph) - Open Wave Data File] screen is
displayed.
-257-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
4. Select the waveform data to be displayed.
Click the <Open> button.
-258-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.11.2
Saving waveform diagnosis data into a file
This section describes how to save waveform diagnosis data into a file.
Procedure
1. If the [Wave Diagnosis Graph] screen is currently not displayed, display
the [Wave Diagnosis Graph] screen as explained in Section 7.11
"Displaying Waveform Diagnosis Graphs."
2. Press the
soft key as required, then select the waveform data
to be saved.
3. Press the
soft key.
The [Wave Diagnosis(Graph) - Save Wave Data] screen is displayed.
-259-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
4. Specify a save location and file name.
Click the <Save> button.
7.12
Displaying the PMC Status Screen
This section describes how to display the PMC status screen.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [PMC Status] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection key
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
4. If the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key.
The [PMC Status] screen is displayed.
-260-
soft key is displayed.
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l PMC status
PMC signal addresses and their statuses are displayed.
When the circle preceding a number is green, the signal is active.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
• Address search
To find the desired address data, press the
enter "Address + Number" (for example, G1234).
-261-
soft key, then
7. SYSTEM
7.13
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the PMC Alarm Screen
This section describes how to display the PMC alarm screen.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [PMC Alarm] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection key
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
4. If the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key.
The [PMC Alarm] screen is displayed.
-262-
soft key is displayed.
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l PMC alarm
The number of an alarm detected on the PMC is displayed together with
the corresponding message.
7.14
Setting the PMC Counter
This section describes how to set the PMC counter.
NOTE
To set the PMC counter, set the following status:
l Operation
Set either of the following statuses:
• Emergency stop
• Stopped or paused in MDI mode
l Setting data
• Enable Parameter Write.
or
l Protect key
• Released
For an explanation of how to specify the setting data, see Section 6.1,
"Setting Data." To change the CNC operating mode from the software
operator's panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel
Settings." For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer
to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [PMC Counter] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
-263-
.
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
4. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key is displayed.
soft key.
The [PMC Counter] screen is displayed.
Explanation
l PMC counter
An address is displayed together with its preset value and current value.
Set a preset value and current value as required.
-264-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.15
Setting the PMC Timer
This section describes how to set the PMC timer.
NOTE
To set the PMC timer, set the following status:
l Operation
Set either of the following statuses:
• Emergency stop
• Reset in MDI mode
l Setting data
• Enable Parameter Write.
For an explanation of how to specify the setting data, see Section 6.1,
"Setting Data." To change the CNC operating mode from the software
operator's panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel
Settings."
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [PMC Timer] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection key
4. If the
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key.
The [PMC Timer] screen is displayed.
-265-
soft key is displayed.
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l PMC timer
An address is displayed together with its value. Set a value as required.
A multiple of 48 can be set for data No. 1 through No. 8. A multiple of 8
can be set for data No. 9 and up.
-266-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.16
Setting the PMC Keep Relay
This section describes how to set the PMC keep relay.
NOTE
To set the PMC keep relay, set the following status:
l Operation
Set either of the following statuses:
• Emergency stop
• Reset in MDI mode
l Setting data
• Enable Parameter Write.
For an explanation of how to specify the setting data, see Section 6.1,
"Setting Data." To change the CNC operating mode from the software
operator's panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel
Settings."
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [PMC Keep Relay] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
4. If the
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
soft key until the
Press the
soft key is displayed.
soft key.
The [PMC Keep Relay] screen is displayed.
-267-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l PMC keep relay
Addresses and their on/off states are displayed.
If the check box
corresponding to the keep relay data is checked, that data is on. Turn
each check box on or off as required. If an attempt is made to turn on or
off the data used by the PMC, the following message is displayed:
If the data of the keep relay may be changed, click the <OK> button.
-268-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.17
Setting PMC Data
This section describes how to set PMC data.
NOTE
To set PMC data, establish the following status:
l Operation
Set either of the following statuses:
• Emergency stop
• Stopped or paused in MDI mode
l Setting data
• Enable Parameter Write.
or
l Protect key
• Released
For an explanation of how to specify the setting data, see Section 6.1,
"Setting Data." To change the CNC operating mode from the software
operator's panel, see Section 6.7, "Software Operator's Panel
Settings." For an explanation of how to release the protect key, refer
to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [PMC Data] screen is currently not displayed, press the chapter
selection key
4. If the
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
soft key until the
-269-
soft key is displayed.
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Press the
soft key.
The [PMC Data] screen is displayed.
Explanation
l PMC data
A group table number and its address, mode, and so forth are displayed.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
• Group number search
To find the desired group data, press the
specify the number.
For details of other functions, see the description below.
-270-
soft key, then
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
7.17.1
Setting the data table of PMC data
This section describes how to set the data table of PMC data.
Procedure
1. If the [PMC Data] screen is currently not displayed, display the [PMC
Data] screen as explained in Section 7.17 "Setting PMC Data."
2. Press the
soft key.
The [PMC Data Table - Group Count] screen is displayed.
3. Enter the total number of groups (not exceeding 100).
Click the <OK> button.
The specified number of data tables are created.
-271-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
4. Set the following data for each group:
l Start address
l Mode
l Protect
l Type
l Data count
For details of each data item, see Explanation below.
Explanation
l Address
Set the start address of a PMC data group.
The start address of a PMC data group may overlap the PMC data of
another group.
l Mode
Set a data mode. The settings correspond to the modes as follows:
0: Decimal
1: Hexadecimal
-272-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
l Protect
Specify whether to enable or disable data write. Data write operation is
enabled or disabled by making the following settings:
0: Enables data write.
1: Disables data write.
l Type
Set a data type. The settings correspond to the data types as follows:
0: Byte type
1: Word type
2: Long type
l Data
Set the total number of data items.
7.17.2
Setting the group data of PMC data
This section describes how to set the group data of PMC data.
NOTE
Before the group data of PMC data can be set, the data table must be
collected.
For an explanation of data table setting, see Section
7.17.1, "Setting the data table of PMC data."
Procedure
1. If the [PMC Data] screen is currently not displayed, display the [PMC
Data] screen as explained in Section 7.17 "Setting PMC Data."
-273-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
2. If the data table is not set, set the data table as explained in Section
7.17.1, "Setting the data table of PMC data."
3. Press the
soft key.
The group data setting screen is displayed.
-274-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
4. Select a group number for which group data is to be set, then set data.
To find the desired data, press the
soft key, then specify the
number.
The user can return to the data table setting screen by pressing the
soft key.
Explanation
l Mode
The mode display field indicates the mode of the group data, specified by
the data table setting. Enter data in the selected mode.
The indications corresponds to the modes as follows:
DEC: Decimal
HEX: Hexadecimal
l Protect
For a group with data write operation disabled by the data table setting,
the indication "Protect" appears at the upper-right corner of the screen.
-275-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
l Address, data
Data addresses and their data values are displayed.
Addresses are displayed according to the type specified by data table
setting, as indicated below.
• Byte type
An address number is followed by an address number obtained by
incrementing the previous address number by 1.
• Word type
An address number is followed by an address number obtained by
incrementing the previous address number by 2.
• Long type
An address number is followed by an address number obtained by
incrementing the previous address number by 4.
-276-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
The table below indicates the specifiable data range dependent on each
mode and type.
Mode
Type
Specifiable data range
Decimal
Byte
-128 to 127
Decimal
Word
-32768 to 32767
Decimal
Long
-2147483648 to 2147483647
Hexadecimal
Byte
80H to 7FH
Hexadecimal
Word
8000H to 7FFFH
Hexadecimal
Long
80000000H to 7FFFFFFFH
-277-
7. SYSTEM
7.17.3
B-62994EN/02
Deleting and initializing all PMC data
This section describes how to delete and initialize all PMC data.
Procedure
1. If the [PMC Data] screen is currently not displayed, display the [PMC
Data] screen as explained in Section 7.17 "Setting PMC Data."
2. Press the
soft key.
The following message is displayed:
3. Click the <OK> button.
All PMC data is deleted and initialized.
-278-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
-279-
7. SYSTEM
7.18
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the Operation History
This section describes how to display the operation history.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. If the [Operation History] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
.
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
4. If the
soft key until the
soft key appears.
soft key.
Press the
The [Operation History] screen appears.
-280-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Operation history display
The history of keystrokes and signal operations performed by the
operator, as well as that of NC alarm occurrences can be displayed.
(1) MDI keystroke history
The keystroke history of the following keys are displayed
• Function keys
<POS>, <PROG>, etc.
• Address/numeric keys
A to Z, 0 to 9, ; (EOB), +, -, etc.
• Page/cursor keys
<PAGE ↑>, <CUR ↓>, <CUR ←>, etc.
• Soft keys
[SF1], [SF2], [SFR], [SFL], etc.
• Other keys
<RESET>, <CAN>, etc.
(2) I/O signal history
The I/O history of those signals that have been set on the signal
selection screen is displayed. To set I/O signals, see Section 7.18.2,
"Setting I/O signals for the operation history."
Example)
G0000. 7↑
Address
Bit
↑ : Indicates that the signal is turned on.
↓ : Indicates that the signal is turned off.
(3) NC alarm occurrence history
The NC alarm occurrence history is displayed in black on red fields.
For an explanation of the meanings of these alarms, refer to the CNC
operator's manual.
When
FS16/18/160/180-MMB/TTB/MMC/TTC
or
FS16i/18i/160i/180i-MT (with the 2-path control function) is used,
the history data of the subsystem (second path) is also displayed.
Each item of the subsystem history data is prefixed with S_.
Example)
<S_POS>, [S_SF1], S_G000.7 ↑, S_PS/01000
-281-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
For details of each function, see the description below.
Operation
l Page
• Pressing the [PageUp] key displays the previous page of the history
information.
• Pressing the [PageDown] key displays the next page of the history
information.
• Pressing the
soft key displays the first (oldest) page of the
history information.
• Pressing the
soft key displays the last (newest) page of the
history information.
7.18.1
Clearing the operation history information
This section describes how to clear the operation history information.
Procedure
1. If the [Operation History] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Operation History] screen as explained in Section 7.18, "Displaying
the Operation History."
-282-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Operation History - Clear] screen appears.
3. Click the <Yes> button.
All the operation history information is cleared.
NOTE
When FS15 is used, the alarm history is also cleared.
-283-
7. SYSTEM
7.18.2
B-62994EN/02
Setting I/O signals for the operation history
This section describes how to set the I/O signals to be recorded in the
operation history.
Procedure
1. If the [Operation History] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Operation History] screen as explained in Section 7.18, "Displaying
the Operation History."
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Operation History] screen appears.
-284-
7. SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
3. Input signal name and bit data to be recorded in the I/O signal history.
Up to 20 data items can be set.
Explanation
l All clear
Pressing the
soft key clears all the currently set operation
history signal data
l Clear
Pressing the
soft key clears the operation history signal data
item to which the cursor is currently positioned.
-285-
8. MESSAGES
8
B-62994EN/02
MESSAGES
This chapter explains how to display alarm messages and other messages.
-286-
8. MESSAGES
B-62994EN/02
8.1
Displaying Alarm Messages
This section explains how to display alarm messages.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Alarm Message] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Alarm Message] screen appears.
Explanation
l Alarm messages
For the meanings of the alarm messages, see the manual supplied with
the CNC.
-287-
8. MESSAGES
8.2
B-62994EN/02
Displaying Operator Messages
This section explains how to display operator messages.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Operator Message] screen is currently not displayed, press the
.
chapter selection key
Press the
soft key.
The [Operator Message] screen appears.
Explanation
l Operator messages
For the meanings of the operator messages, refer to the manual supplied
by the machine tool builder.
-288-
8. MESSAGES
B-62994EN/02
8.3
Displaying the Alarm Message History
This section explains how to display the alarm message history.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Alarm History] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Alarm History] screen appears.
Explanation
l Alarm history
The alarm message history is displayed.
For the meanings of the alarm messages, refer to the manual supplied
with the CNC.
-289-
8. MESSAGES
B-62994EN/02
l Operation soft key
To delete the alarm message history, press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft key appears.
NOTE
When the FS15 is being used, the Clear soft key is not displayed.
For details of the function, see the description below.
8.3.1
Deleting the entire alarm message history
The following explains how to delete the entire alarm message history.
NOTE
When FS15 is used, the [Alarm History] screen cannot be used to
delete the alarm history. To delete the alarm history, see Section
7.18.1, "Clearing the operation history information."
Procedure
1. If the [Alarm History] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Alarm History] screen by following the procedure explained in Section
8.3, "Displaying the Alarm Message History."
-290-
8. MESSAGES
B-62994EN/02
2. Press the
soft key.
3. The [Alarm History - Clear] screen appears.
4. Click the <OK> button.
The entire alarm message history is deleted.
-291-
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
9
B-62994EN/02
MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION
(OPTION)
This chapter explains how to perform machining-in-progress drawing when a
milling machine tool is used.
-292-
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
B-62994EN/02
9.1
Setting Tools for Machining-in-Progress Drawing
This section explains how to set (register, modify, and delete) tools for
machining-in-progress drawing for a program that is currently running.
NOTE
Machining-in-progress
drawing
is
enabled
only
by
the
FS16i/18i/160i/180i-MA.
In addition, a CNC option is required to
perform machining-in-progress drawing.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Tool Data Edit] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Tool Data Edit] screen appears.
-293-
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
l Editing tool data
Tool data for machining-in-progress drawing can be registered, modified,
and deleted. The tools having the T codes used in the program for which
machining-in-progress drawing is to be performed must be registered.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
For details of each function, see the description below.
9.1.1
Registering tools for machining-in-progress drawing
This section explains how to register tools for machining-in-progress
drawing.
Procedure
1. If the [Tool Data Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Tool Data Edit] screen by following the procedure explained in
Section 9.1, "Setting Tools for Machining-in-Progress Drawing."
2. Specify a T code and tool type, and specify the required dimension data
for the tool type.
-294-
B-62994EN/02
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
3. Press the
soft key.
The tool is registered.
-295-
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
9.1.2
B-62994EN/02
Modifying tool data for machining-in-progress drawing
This section explains how to modify the dimensions and other information for
tools registered for machining-in-progress drawing.
Procedure
1. If the [Tool Data Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Tool Data Edit] screen by following the procedure explained in
Section 9.1, "Setting Tools for Machining-in-Progress Drawing."
2. Specify the tool you want to modify by selecting the T code of the tool.
The data for the selected tool appears.
-296-
B-62994EN/02
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
3. Modify tool data.
When the T code is changed, the tool is registered as a new tool having
a specified T code.
4. Press the
soft key.
The tool data is modified.
9.1.3
Deleting tools for machining-in-progress drawing
This section explains how to delete the tools registered for machining-inprogress drawing.
Procedure
1. If the [Tool Data Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Tool Data Edit] screen by following the procedure explained in
Section 9.1, "Setting Tools for Machining-in-Progress Drawing."
-297-
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
B-62994EN/02
2. Specify the tool you want to delete by selecting the T code of the tool.
Multiple tools can also be specified.
3. Press the
soft key.
The following message appears:
4. If the tool with the displayed tool code is to be deleted, click the <Yes>
button.
If the tool with the displayed tool code is not to be deleted, click the
<No> button.
When you have selected more than one tool, you are then asked whether
you want to delete the next tool. Once you have been asked about all
the selected tools, the specified tools are deleted.
If the <Cancel> button is clicked at any point, the displayed tool and all
subsequent tools are not deleted.
-298-
B-62994EN/02
9.1.4
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
Saving tool data for machining-in-progress drawing into a file
This section explains how to save the tool data registered for machining-inprogress drawing into a file.
Procedure
1. If the [Tool Data Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Tool Data Edit] screen by following the procedure explained in
Section 9.1, "Setting Tools for Machining-in-Progress Drawing."
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Save As] screen appears.
-299-
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
B-62994EN/02
3. Specify the location (folder) where you want to save the tool data, and
the file name.
Click the <Save> button.
The tool data is then saved into the file.
9.1.5
Reading tool data for machining-in-progress drawing from a file
This section explains how to read tool data for machining-in-progress
drawing saved into a file.
Procedure
1. If the [Tool Data Edit] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Tool Data Edit] screen by following the procedure explained in
Section 9.1, "Setting Tools for Machining-in-Progress Drawing."
2. Press the
soft key.
The [Open] screen appears.
-300-
B-62994EN/02
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
3. Specify the name of a file to be read.
Click the <Open> button.
The tool data is read from the file.
-301-
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
9.2
B-62994EN/02
Performing Machining-in-Progress Drawing
This section explains how to make necessary settings including material data
setting and drawing scale setting for machining-in-progress drawing for a
running program.
The section also explains how to start machining-in-
progress drawing.
NOTE
l Machining-in-progress
drawing
is
supported
only
by
the
FS16i/18i/160i/180i-MA. In addition, a CNC option is required to
perform machining-in-progress drawing.
l Before machining-in-progress drawing can be performed, the tool
data for machining-in-progress drawing must be registered.
For an explanation of how to register tool data for machining-inprogress drawing, see Section 9.1, "Setting Tools for Machining-inProgress Drawing."
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
.
2. Press the
soft key.
3. If the [Tool Data Edit] screen is currently not displayed, press the
chapter selection key
Press the
.
soft key.
The [Machining Draw] screen appears.
-302-
B-62994EN/02
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
Explanation
l Machining-in-progress drawing
Machining-in-progress drawing can be performed for a program that is
currently running.
l Operation soft keys
Press the operation selection key
.
The operation soft keys appear.
For details of each function, see the description below.
9.2.1
Settings for machining-in-progress drawing
This section explains how to set the material data setting and drawing scale
setting required for machining-in-progress drawing for a program that is
currently running.
The setting data is automatically saved into a file.
Procedure
1. If the [Machining Draw] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Machining Draw] screen by following the procedure explained in
Section 9.2, "Performing Machining-in-Progress Drawing."
-303-
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
2. Press the
B-62994EN/02
soft key.
The [Open] screen appears.
3. Specify the location (folder) where you want to create the setting data,
and the file name.
If the existing file that has setting data is specified, that setting file is
read.
If a new file name is specified, a setting file is newly created.
Click the <Open> button.
The [Setting] screen appears.
-304-
B-62994EN/02
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
4. Set the required data.
For details of each setting item, see "Explanation."
Click the <OK> button.
The settings are determined, and saved into the setting file.
-305-
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
The following data can be set:
l File
The file for the setting data can be renamed.
l Material
• Block-shaped material
Size
Specify the width, depth, and height of the block-shaped material.
Install position
Specify the position of the origin of the workpiece coordinate
system, as viewed from the bottom plane of the lower left corner of
the block-shaped material.
-306-
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
B-62994EN/02
• Cylindrical material
Size
Specify the radius and height of the cylindrical material.
Install position
Specify the position of the origin of the workpiece coordinate
system, as viewed from the cylinder center on the bottom plane.
l Scale
• Manual scale
Scale
Specify the drawing scale of the material.
-307-
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
B-62994EN/02
Screen center
Specify the position of the center of the drawing screen in the
workpiece coordinate system.
• Automatic scale
Minimum value of the drawing range
Specify the minimum value of the drawing range.
Maximum value of the drawing range
Specify the maximum value of the drawing range.
l View direction
-308-
B-62994EN/02
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
• View direction
Specify the view direction of the material.
• Rotation angle, angle of inclination
When the view direction is isometric, specify the rotation angle and
inclination angle of the material.
l Drawing method
• Draw object
If "Tool path" is selected, only the tool path is drawn.
If "Work figure" is selected, both the material and tool are drawn,
and the machining can be observed.
• Interfere check
If the Interfere check box is checked, any portion where the material
and part of the tool, except the cutter, interfere is indicated in red.
NOTE
This interfere check function checks only for interference
between the material and part of the tool except the cutter (any
interference between the tool during rapid traverse and the
material, for example, is not checked).
• Refresh time
As a faster Refresh time is set, the tool movement can be displayed
in more detail.
NOTE
In some operating environments, setting a fast Refresh time
rate may prevent machining-in-progress drawing from being
performed.
-309-
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
9.2.2
B-62994EN/02
Starting machining-in-progress drawing
This section explains how to start machining-in-progress drawing for a
program that is being executed.
NOTE
l Machining-in-progress
drawing
is
supported
only
by
the
FS16i/18i/160i/180i-MA. In addition, a CNC option is required to
perform machining-in-progress drawing.
l Before machining-in-progress drawing can be performed, the
registration of tool data for machining-in-progress drawing and
machining-in-progress drawing settings are required.
For an explanation of how to register tool data for machining-inprogress drawing, see Section 9.1, "Setting Tools for Machining-inProgress Drawing."
For an explanation of how to make the settings for machining-inprogress drawing, see Section 9.2.1, "Settings for machining-inprogress drawing."
Procedure
1. If the [Machining Draw] screen is currently not displayed, display the
[Machining Draw] screen by following the procedure explained in
Section 9.2, "Performing Machining-in-Progress Drawing."
2. If the required settings have not yet been made, make the settings by
following the procedure explained in Section 9.2.1, "Settings for
machining-in-progress drawing."
-310-
B-62994EN/02
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
3. Press the
soft key.
4. Execute the program registered in the CNC.
For an explanation of how to execute a program, refer to the manual
supplied by the machine tool builder.
Machining-in-progress drawing then starts.
5. To stop machining-in-progress drawing, press the
-311-
soft key.
9. MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION)
-312-
B-62994EN/02
10. CUSTOM
B-62994EN/02
10
CUSTOM
This chapter explains how to insert an OLE object.
-313-
10. CUSTOM
10.1
B-62994EN/02
Displaying the OLE Object Screen
This section explains how to display the OLE object screen.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
The [OLE Object] screen appears.
Explanation
l Menu
A desired operation can be performed by choosing from the menu
displayed in the upper left part of the parent window.
Menu
-314-
10. CUSTOM
B-62994EN/02
• [File] menu
The following functions are provided. For details, see the example
given in the next section.
• [Window] menu
The following window layout functions are provided:
-315-
10. CUSTOM
10.1.1
B-62994EN/02
Example for inserting an OLE object
This section explains how to insert an OLE object. Microsoft Word is used
as an example.
Procedure
1. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the function
selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
The [OLE Object] screen appears.
Let us insert Microsoft Word into Basic Operation Package 1.
3. Select [File] then [New].
The [Insert Object] screen appears.
-316-
10. CUSTOM
B-62994EN/02
4. Select "Microsoft Word 6.0 Document."
Click the <OK> button.
Microsoft Word is then inserted.
Microsoft Word is now usable.
-317-
10. CUSTOM
B-62994EN/02
Next, let us save the inserted OLE object into a file.
5. Select [File] then [Save As].
The [Save As] screen appears.
6. Specify the file name.
Click the <Save> button.
-318-
10. CUSTOM
B-62994EN/02
Next, let us read back the OLE object that was saved into the file.
1. Select [File] then [Open].
The [Open] screen appears.
-319-
10. CUSTOM
B-62994EN/02
2. Select the file.
Click the <Open> button.
Now, let us terminate OLE object editing and display the object image
only.
3. Select [File] then [Close OLE Object].
-320-
10. CUSTOM
B-62994EN/02
-321-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
11
B-62994EN/02
CUSTOMIZATION
This chapter describes how to customize Basic Operation Package 1.
-322-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
11.1
Customizing General Settings for Basic Operation Package 1
This section explains the basic customization of Basic Operation Package 1.
NOTE
Customization results are stored in the setting file.
It is recommended that a backup of the setting file be made to guard
against possible data loss.
For details of the setting file, see Appendix 2, "BACKING UP THE
SETTING FILE."
Procedure
1. Right-click the soft key area.
Alternatively, press the [Application] key on the keyboard (such as the
Microsoft Natural keyboard or 109 keyboard).
Alternatively, press [Shift]+[F10].
The following pop-up menu appears.
2. Choose [Setting].
The [Setting] screen appears.
-323-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
Select the "General", "Soft key", or "Color" tab to make the desired
settings.
l General
Sets general options for Basic Operation Package 1.
l Soft key
Sets soft keys.
l Color
Sets the background color of each area within a parent window.
l Path
Sets the path number output.
For details, see the description below.
-324-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
11.1.1
Setting general options for Basic Operation Package 1
This section describes how to set the general options for Basic Operation
Package 1.
Procedure
1. If the [Setting] screen is currently not displayed, follow the procedure
shown in Section 11.1, "Customizing General Settings for Basic
Operation Package 1" to display the [Setting] screen.
Explanation
The setting items are as follows:
l Lock all screen position and size.
Selecting this item prevents the changing of the position and size of a
window.
l Display date and time.
Selecting this item causes the date and time to be displayed in the upperright corner of a parent window.
l Correct CNC time to PC one when startup.
Selecting this item causes the CNC time to be synchronized with the
personal computer time when the operator starts Basic Operation
Package 1.
For the FS150 CNC, this item is disabled.
-325-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
l Display the spindle load meter.
Selecting this item causes the spindle load meter to be displayed in the
middle of a parent window.
l To be foreground at alarm.
Selecting this item causes the alarm message screen to appear in the
foreground when an alarm condition occurs.
l Display the title window when startup.
Selecting this item causes the title to be displayed when the operator
starts Basic Operation Package 1.
l Confirm when exit.
Selecting this item causes the confirmation screen to appear when the
operator exits from Basic Operation Package 1.
l Exit Windows when exit.
Selecting this item enables the operator to exit from Windows when
exiting from Basic Operation Package 1.
l Enable the language switch function.
Selecting this item enables the language switching option when the
operator exits Basic Operation Package 1.
For details of how to switch between languages, see Section 11.4.2,
"Switching the message language."
l Integrate with DNC Operation Management Package.
When DNC Operation Management Package has been installed, selecting
this item enables the use of the DNC Operation Management Package
functions with Basic Operation Package 1.
For details of how to integrate the DNC Operation Management Package,
see Section 11.6, "Integrating DNC Operation Management Package."
l NC program is always saved as main.
When the [Program Edit] screen is used to write an NC program back to
the NC, the [Save as main] check box is selected even in Memory mode
(or AUTO mode for Power Mate), in the same way as in any of the other
modes.
For an explanation of how to write NC programs back to the NC, see
Section 5.1.2, "Writing an NC program back to the NC."
-326-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
11.1.2
Setting soft keys
This section describes how to set the soft keys.
Procedure
1. If the [Setting] screen is currently not displayed, follow the procedure
shown in Section 11.1, "Customizing General Settings for Basic
Operation Package 1" to display the [Setting] screen.
Explanation
The setting items are as follows:
l Use CNC MDI key.
Selecting this item enables a function soft key to be selected using the
MDI keys that generate the equivalent key codes of [0] to [9] keys on the
numeric keypad of the full keyboard. The correspondence between the
soft keys and keypad keys is as follows:
The correspondence between the soft keys and keyboard function keys is
switched to that shown below:
-327-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
l The return soft key is always left side.
Clearing this item enables the soft keys to be switched as follows:
• Function soft keys
Pressing the
soft key or [F1] key switches to the chapter soft
keys.
Pressing the
soft key or [F12] key switches to the operation
soft keys.
• Chapter soft keys
Pressing the
soft key or [F1] key switches to the function soft
keys.
Pressing the
soft key or [F12] key switches to the operation
soft keys.
• Operation soft keys
Pressing the
soft key or [F1] key switches to the chapter soft
keys.
Pressing the
keys.
-328-
soft key or [F12] key switches to the function soft
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
l The soft key count is 10.
Selecting this item sets the soft key count to 10.
Use the keyboard function keys to switch between the function, chapter,
and operation soft keys.
Standard switching mode is as follows:
• Function soft keys
Pressing the [F12] key switches to the chapter soft keys.
• Chapter soft keys
Pressing the [F11] key switches to the function soft keys.
Pressing the [F12] key switches to the operation soft keys.
• Operation soft keys
Pressing the [F11] key switches to the chapter soft keys
l Proceed to next state of the soft key to select.
Selecting this item causes, for example, the operation soft keys to appear
automatically when a chapter soft key is selected.
l F11 = Shift+F1, F12 = Shift+F2
Selecting this item defines the following key combinations:
Key combination
Equivalent
[Shift]+[F1]
[F11]
[Shift]+[F2]
[F12]
l Return key to space key on button.
Selecting this item enables the return key to act as the space key when the
buttons are used.
l Set ON/OFF by key 1/0 on check box.
Selecting this item enables a check box to be selected or cleared using
the [1] or [0] key, respectively. Note that this function is disabled on the
[Setting] screen.
-329-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
11.1.3
B-62994EN/02
Setting screen colors
This section describes how to set the background color of each area within a
parent window.
Procedure
1. If the [Setting] screen is currently not displayed, follow the procedure
shown in Section 11.1, "Customizing General Settings for Basic
Operation Package 1" to display the [Setting] screen.
2. From the "Color type:" list, select an area in which the background
color is to be changed.
Alternatively, click the text in an area within the preview display.
3. Enter a hexadecimal RGB value in "Color value:".
Alternatively, press
shown below.
-330-
, then select a color from the [Color] screen, as
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
The background colors of the following areas within a parent window can
be set:
l Title line
l Status line
l Parent window base screen
l Soft key area
-331-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
11.1.4
B-62994EN/02
Setting the path number output option
This section describes how to set the path number output option.
Procedure
1. If the [Setting] screen is currently not displayed, follow the procedure
described in Section 11.1, "Customizing General Settings for Basic
Operation Package 1" to display the [Setting] screen.
Explanation
Set the I/O address to output a path number in a bit pattern.
-332-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
11.2
Customizing Screens
This section explains screen customization, including the creation of custom
chapters.
NOTE
Customization results are stored in the setting file.
It is recommended that a backup of the setting file be made to guard
against data loss.
For details of the setting file, see Appendix 1, "BACKING UP THE
SETTING FILE."
Procedure
1. Right-click the soft key area.
Alternatively, press the [Application] key on the keyboard (such as the
Microsoft Natural keyboard or 109 keyboard).
Alternatively, press [Shift]+[F10].
The following pop-up menu appears.
2. Choose [Screen Customization].
The [Screen Customization] screen appears.
-333-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
The following types of screen customization can be performed:
l Creating custom screens
l Changing the order in which screens appear
l Deleting screens
l Showing or hiding chapters
l Setting soft keys as empty
For details, see the description below.
11.2.1
Creating custom screens
This section describes how to combine screens to create a custom chapter.
Procedure
1. If the [Screen Customization] screen is currently not displayed, follow
the procedure shown in Section 11.2, “Customizing Screens” to display
the [Screen Customization] screen.
-334-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
2. In the screen layout tree, select the icon for an unused function.
3. In "Function name for title:", enter the text to be displayed on the title
bar of a parent window. In "Function name for soft key:", enter the
text to be displayed on a function soft key.
4. Click the
button.
A chapter is added to the selected function.
-335-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
5. In "Chapter name for title:", enter the text to be displayed on the title
bar of a child window. In "Chapter name for soft key:", enter the text
to be displayed on a chapter soft key.
6. Click the + sign in the screen layout tree to view the screen to be
added. Then, click the + sign to view the name of the child window to
be displayed.
When a new chapter is added, the name of a child window is set
automatically.
7. From the "Screen object ID:" list, select a screen object to be displayed
in the child window.
-336-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
In this example, the custom macro screen is selected.
8. To add another child window, click the
button.
9. From the "Screen object ID:" list, select a screen object to be displayed
in the child window in the same way as in step 7.
-337-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
10.
Add a screen object to be displayed in the child window, as described
above.
11.
From the "Main screen object ID:" list, select the main screen for the
chapter.
NOTE
If the feature specified for the main screen is unavailable on the
CNC side, the chapter is not displayed.
12.
To set a chapter display option, select the "Event" tab.
-338-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
13.
Select an item or items to be set. The following items can be set:
l Change the chapter at alarm.
Selecting this item causes automatic switching to this chapter when
a CNC alarm condition occurs.
l Change the chapter at operator message.
Selecting this item causes automatic switching to this chapter when
an operator message is issued.
l Change the chapter at PMC alarm.
Selecting this item causes automatic switching to this chapter when
a PMC alarm condition occurs.
14.
Select "PCheck" in the screen layout tree, then select the "Icon" tab.
15.
Specify an icon to be displayed on the function soft key.
The resource number of a built-in icon or the name of a file containing
an icon can be specified.
NOTE
A file that can be used for an icon is referred to as an icon file
(file with the .ICO extension). Icon files can be created using a
tool such as the icon editor supplied with Windows.
16.
Click the <OK> button in the [Screen Customization] screen.
-339-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
Pressing the
-340-
soft key shows the added screens.
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
11.2.2
Changing the order in which screens appear
This section describes how to change the order in which the function, chapter,
or child window screens appear.
Procedure
1. If the [Screen Customization] screen is currently not displayed, follow
the procedure shown in Section 11.2, "Customizing Screens" to display
the [Screen Customization] screen.
2. In the screen layout tree, select a function, chapter, or child window
object to be moved to another position.
3. Click the
or
selected object to the desired position.
-341-
button to move the
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
4. Click the <OK> button on the [Screen Customization] screen.
NOTE
If a chapter is selected, it cannot be moved to another function.
If an object displayed in a child window is selected, it cannot be
moved across chapters.
11.2.3
Deleting screens
This section describes how to delete function, chapter, or child window
screens.
Procedure
1. If the [Screen Customization] screen is currently not displayed, follow
the procedure shown in Section 11.2, "Customizing Screens" to display
the [Screen Customization] screen.
2. In the screen layout tree, select a function, chapter, or child window
object to be deleted.
-342-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
3. Click the
button.
The selected function, chapter, or child window object is deleted.
11.2.4
Showing or hiding chapters
This section describes how to show or hide chapters.
Procedure
1. If the [Screen Customization] screen is currently not displayed, follow
the procedure shown in Section 11.2, "Customizing Screens" to display
the [Screen Customization] screen.
2. In the screen layout tree, select a chapter object to be shown or hidden.
-343-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
The check box for showing or hiding a chapter is enabled.
Explanation
Whether a chapter is shown can be determined using the following item:
l The chapter is visible.
Clearing this item hides a specified chapter. Those screens that are not
normally used, such as the maintenance screen, can be erased temporally.
-344-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
11.2.5
Setting soft keys as empty
This section describes how to set function or chapter soft keys as empty.
In the description below, a chapter is added to a function, then the chapter is
set as empty.
Procedure
1. If the [Screen Customization] screen is currently not displayed, follow
the procedure shown in Section 11.2, "Customizing Screens" to display
the [Screen Customization] screen.
2. In the screen layout tree, select a function object to which a chapter is
to be added.
3. Click the
button.
A chapter is added to the selected function.
-345-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
4. Click the
button.
The selected chapter is set as empty.
-346-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
11.3
Customizing Screen Objects
This section describes how to customize screen objects.
NOTE
Customization results are stored in the setting file.
It is recommended that a backup of the setting file be made to guard
against data loss.
For details of the setting file, see Appendix 2, "BACKING UP THE
SETTING FILE."
NOTE
When customizing screen objects, the operator must be familiar with
Windows and OLE automation.
Procedure
1. Right-click the soft key area.
Alternatively, press the [Application] key on the keyboard (such as the
Microsoft Natural keyboard or 109 keyboard).
Alternatively, press [Shift]+[F10].
The following pop-up menu appears.
2. Choose [Screen Customization].
The [Screen Customization] screen appears.
-347-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
3. Click the
button.
The [Edit Screen Object] screen appears.
Explanation
The following types of screen object customization can be performed:
l Creating custom screen objects
l Changing settings for screen objects
l Deleting screen objects
For details, see the description below.
-348-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
11.3.1
Creating custom screen objects
This section describes how to create custom screen objects.
Procedure
1. If the [Edit Screen Object] screen is currently not displayed, follow the
procedure shown in Section 11.3, "Customizing Screen Objects" to
display the [Edit Screen Object] screen.
2. Click the
button.
The [New ID] screen appears.
3. Enter a unique ID in the "New ID:".
Click the <OK> button.
-349-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
4. Specify an object type.
One of the following object types can be specified:
• CNC Screen
A CNC screen is an OLE object described in Appendix 2,
"CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL."
Normally, FANUC
provides objects of this type.
CNC screens are classified as follows:
Foreground only
Background enable
Those screens that are set as "foreground only" are loaded or
unloaded upon each screen switching. The cursor position and other
information is not maintained.
Those screens that are set as "background enable" are not unloaded
upon screen switching, and therefore remain in memory. The cursor
position and other information is maintained.
(Examples are screens for tool offset data or custom macro
variables.)
NOTE
To prevent excessive memory or resource consumption, the
number of screens to be set as "background enable" must be
kept to a minimum.
• OLE container screen
An OLE container screen is used to display or edit general OLE
objects.
Select an OLE container screen for those operations that involve
OLE objects for which an appropriate menu or tool bar is to be
displayed in a parent window, such as visual editing using Microsoft
Word, Microsoft Excel, or other OLE-enabled application.
-350-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
• EXE file
An EXE file is a general Windows application such as Notepad.
This type of application is not displayed in a child window, and runs
independently of Basic Operation Package 1.
5. Enter a value in "OLE ProgID or EXE file name:".
When "CNC Screen" or "OLE container screen" is selected for the
object type, enter OLE ProgID of the OLE object to be used. If a null
string is entered as OLE ProgID, no information is displayed in the
child window.
When "EXE file" is selected for the object type, enter the EXE file
name (preferably the full path name).
6. In "Object name:", enter text to be displayed on the title bar of the
child window.
-351-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
7. Select the "Icon" tab.
8. Specify an icon to be displayed on the title bar of the child window.
The resource number of a built-in icon or the name of a file containing
an icon can be specified.
NOTE
A file that can be used for an icon is referred to as an icon file
(file with the .ICO extension). Icon files can be created using a
tool such as the icon editor provided with Windows.
9. Select the "CNC" tab.
-352-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
10.
Select a CNC path to be processed on the screen.
One of the following items can be selected:
• Default path
Sets the screen for the path displayed on the status line.
• Path 1
Sets the screen for CNC path 1.
• Path 2
Sets the screen for CNC path 2.
• Path 3
Sets the screen for CNC path 3.
• Path 4
Sets the screen for CNC path 4.
• Loader
Sets the screen for the loader controller.
• Independent of path
Sets the screen as the path-independent screen.
NOTE
When "EXE file" is selected for the object type, this item need
not be set.
11.
Select the "Color" tab.
-353-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
12.
Specify the background color of a screen.
Enter a hexadecimal RGB value in "Background color:".
Alternatively, press
, then select a color from the [Color] screen,
as shown below.
NOTE
l When "EXE file" is selected for the object type, this item need
not be set.
l The background color can be changed only for those screen
objects that have the BackColor property. Currently, not all
CNC screens have the BackColor property.
(Determine
whether the specified screen object has the BackColor
property by using the Visual Basic property window or by some
other method.)
l When &HFFFFFFFF is specified for the background color, the
default background color is set.
13.
Click the <OK> button in the [Edit Screen Object] screen.
A screen object is created.
-354-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
11.3.2
Changing settings of screen objects
This section describes how to change the settings of screen objects.
Procedure
1. If the [Edit Screen Object] screen is currently not displayed, follow the
procedure shown in Section 11.3, "Customizing Screen Objects" to
display the [Edit Screen Object] screen.
2. From the "Screen object ID:" combo box, select the ID of a screen to
be edited.
-355-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
3. Change the desired setting items.
For details of the setting items, see Section 11.3.1, "Creating custom
screen objects."
4. Click the <OK> button on the [Edit Screen Object] screen.
This completes the editing of the screen object.
11.3.3
Deleting screen objects
This section describes how to delete screen objects.
Procedure
1. If the [Edit Screen Object] screen is currently not displayed, follow the
procedure shown in Section 11.3, "Customizing Screen Objects" to
display the [Edit Screen Object] screen.
2. From the "Screen object ID:" combo box, select the ID of the screen to
be deleted.
-356-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
NOTE
If a selected screen object is currently selected in a chapter, the
<Delete ID> button is disabled, and therefore the object cannot
be deleted.
3. Click the
button.
4. Click the <OK> button on the [Edit Screen Object] screen.
This completes the editing of the screen object.
-357-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
11.4
B-62994EN/02
Customizing Message Languages
This section describes message language customization, including the
installation of two or more message languages in Basic Operation Package 1.
NOTE
Before installing a new language environment, message files and
subfolders must be created.
For an explanation of how to create message files and subfolders, see
Appendix 4, "SWITCHING THE MESSAGE LANGUAGE" and
Appendix 5, "MESSAGE FILE GENERATOR."
NOTE
Before installing a language environment, the operator must start and
terminate Basic Operation Package 1 one or more times.
For an explanation of how to start and terminate Basic Operation
Package 1, see Section 2.1, "Starting and Terminating Basic
Operation Package 1."
Procedure
1. Right-click the soft key area.
Alternatively, press the [Application] key on the keyboard (such as the
Microsoft Natural keyboard or 109 keyboard).
Alternatively, press [Shift]+[F10].
The following pop-up menu appears.
2. Choose [Language Switcher Setting].
The [Language Switcher Setting] screen appears.
-358-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
Explanation
The following types of message language customization can be performed:
l Installing new message languages
l Changing the order in which message languages are listed
l Uninstalling message languages
For details, see the description below.
11.4.1
Installing message languages
This section describes how to install message languages in Basic Operation
Package 1.
Once two or more message languages have been installed in Basic Operation
Package 1, switching between these languages is enabled.
Procedure
1. If the [Language Switcher Setting] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure shown in Section 11.4, "Customizing Message
Languages" to display the [Language Switcher Setting] screen.
-359-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
2. Click the
button.
The [New Language Name] screen appears.
3. Enter the name of a language to be installed.
Click the <OK> button.
4. Specify a subfolder in which message files are to be installed, and a
subfolder in which INI files are to be installed.
Click the <OK> button.
The message language is installed.
11.4.2
Switching the message language
This section describes how to switch the message language.
Once two or more message languages have been installed in Basic Operation
Package 1, switching between these languages is enabled.
Procedure
1. Follow the procedure shown in Section 11.1, "Customizing General
Settings for Basic Operation Package 1" to display the [Setting] screen.
-360-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
2. Select the "Enable the language switch function." check box.
Click the <OK> button.
3. If the
soft key is currently not displayed, press the
function selection key
4. Press the
.
soft key.
The [Exit Basic Operation Package] screen appears.
5. Select "Switch language after restart?".
Select the desired language.
Click the <Yes> button.
Basic Operation Package 1 is restarted automatically, then the language
is switched to the selected language.
-361-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
11.4.3
B-62994EN/02
Changing the order in which message languages are listed
This section describes how to change the order in which message languages
are listed.
For switching between message languages, these languages are usually listed
in the order in which they were installed. If many message languages have
been installed, those which are used most frequently can be placed at the top
of the list to enable their easy selection.
Procedure
1. If the [Language Switcher Setting] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure shown in Section 11.4, "Customizing Message
Languages" to display the [Language Switcher Setting] screen.
2. Select a language to be moved to another position.
3. Click the
or
selected language to the desired position.
-362-
button to move the
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
11.4.4
Uninstalling message languages
This section describes how to uninstall message languages from Basic
Operation Package 1.
NOTE
When a message language is uninstalled, the language is deleted
from the message language list, but its message files and INI files are
not deleted.
Procedure
1. If the [Language Switcher Setting] screen is currently not displayed,
follow the procedure shown in Section 11.4, "Customizing Message
Languages" to display the [Language Switcher Setting] screen.
2. Select a language to be uninstalled.
3. Click the
button.
The selected language is deleted from the list and uninstalled.
-363-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
11.5
B-62994EN/02
Customizing Alarm Messages
This section describes how to customize the alarm messages to be displayed
on a screen.
An alarm message can be customized by describing the alarm number and
corresponding message in the alarm message setting file.
When an alarm condition occurs, its alarm number and alarm message are
displayed if they are described in the setting file.
If this description is not contained in the setting file, an alarm message
obtained from the CNC is displayed.
The names and types of the alarm message setting files are as follows:
l Names and types of alarm message setting files
Setting file name
ALARM16M.INI
Setting file type
For FS16/18/21/160/180/210-M series,
NC Board-M series
ALARM16T.INI
For FS16/18/21/160/180/210-T series,
NC Board-T series
ALARM15M.INI
For FS15/150-M series
ALARM15T.INI
For FS15/150-T series
ALARMPM.INI
For Power Mate
During Basic Operation Package 1 installation, these setting files are
stored into the INI folder subordinate to the folder in which Basic
Operation Package 1 is installed.
NOTE
Before alarm message customization, it is recommended that a
backup of the alarm message setting file be made to guard
against data loss.
l Description format in the alarm message setting file
The description format in the alarm message setting file is as follows:
[ALARM]
alarm-number="message-text"
alarm-number="message-text"
alarm-number="message-text"
......................................................
......................................................
-364-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
• Specify [ALARM] as the section name at the beginning.
• Describe each message on a single line, using up to 78 bytes.
The format in the file and the corresponding display image on the screen
are as follows:
Description : alarm-number="message-text"
Display
: alarm-number message-text
FS160/180/210 or NC Board
(Example)
Description: 100="Parameter Write enable."
Display
: 100 Parameter Write enable.
FS150
Prefix an alarm number with an abbreviation (two alphabetical
characters) representing the alarm group.
The abbreviations are as follows:
BG, PS, OH, SB, SN, SW, OT, PC, EX, SR, SV, IO, PW, MC
The abbreviations are the same as those displayed on the CNC
alarm screens. For details, refer to the CNC documentation.
(Example)
Description: SW0="Parameter enable switch ON."
Display
: SW000 Parameter enable switch ON.
NOTE
For all models, specify an alarm number without a leading zero.
l Replacing a symbol in an axis alarm message with the axis name
For axis data, %s in the message text described in the setting file is
replaced with the axis name.
Example where the axis name is X:
Description : 500="Over travel %s axis."
Display
-365-
: 500 Over travel X axis.
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
If more than one %s is specified, each is replaced with the axis name.
Example where the axis name is X:
Description : 500="%s:Over travel %s axis."
Display
: 500 X:Over travel X axis.
If no %s is specified, the axis name is added at the beginning of the
displayed message text.
Example where the axis name is X:
Description : 500="Over travel."
Display
: 500 X Over travel.
l Replacing a symbol in a spindle alarm message with the spindle alarm
number (for FS16/18/21, Power Mate-D, Power Mate i-D)
For some spindle alarms the spindle alarm number in the AL-xx format
is added (xx is numeric characters).
In this case, %d in the message text described in the setting file is
replaced with the spindle alarm number.
Example where the spindle alarm number is 01:
Description : 751="1st spindle alarm detection:AL-%d"
Display
: 751 1st spindle alarm detection:AL-01
If more than one %d is specified, each is replaced with the spindle alarm
number.
Example where the spindle alarm number is 01:
Description : 751="%d:1st spindle alarm detection:AL-%d"
Display
: 751 01:1st spindle alarm detection:AL-01
If no %d is specified, the alarm number in AL-xx format is added at the
end of the displayed message text.
Example where the spindle alarm number is 01:
Description : 751="1st spindle alarm detection"
Display
-366-
: 751 1st spindle alarm detection(AL-01)
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
11.6
Integrating DNC Operation Management Package
This section describes how to integrate the DNC Operation Management
Package.
When the DNC Operation Management Package is integrated with Basic
Operation Package 1, the DNC Operation Management Package functions
can be used with Basic Operation Package 1.
NOTE
To integrate the DNC Operation Management Package, it must have
already been installed.
When Basic Operation Package 1 and the DNC Operation
Management Package are to be installed on the same personal
computer, Basic Operation Package 1 version 1.4 or later should be
used, regardless of whether these two packages are to be integrated.
Procedure
1. If the [Setting] screen is currently not displayed, follow the procedure
described in Section 11.1, "Customizing General Settings for Basic
Operation Package 1" to display the [Setting] screen. Then, click the
"General" tab.
2. Select "Integrate with DNC Operation Management Package".
3. Exit from and restart Basic Operation Package 1.
-367-
11. CUSTOMIZATION
B-62994EN/02
NOTE
When DNC Operation Management Package is integrated with Basic
Operation Package 1, starting the DNC Operation Management
Package also starts Basic Operation Package 1.
Explanation
The DNC Operation Management Package screen can be displayed by
means of the following procedure:
[Program] soft key is currently not displayed, press the
1. If the
function selection key
2. Press the
.
soft key.
3. Press the chapter selection key
Press the
,
.
, or
soft key to display the
DNC Operation Management Package screen.
For an explanation of how to operate the DNC Operation Management
Package, refer to the DNC Operation Management Package operator's
manual
-368-
APPENDIX
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
APPENDIX
1
REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
-371-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
1 Over All Position Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board
Supported NC
Option
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Parameter 1020 = 88 X
screen
= 89 Y
= 90 Z
= 85 U
= 86 V
= 87 W
= 65 A
= 66 B
= 67 C
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Parameter 3115#0 = 0 Displayed
= 1 Not displayed
Switch between inch/metric (for Relative, Absolute, Distance to Go)
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Switch between inch/metric (for Machine)
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 1001#1 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Parameter 0012#0 = 0 Not use mirror image
= 1 Use mirror image
Displayed/Not displayed of “Distance to Go”
Except JOG mode Displayed
JOG mode
Not displayed
Display of soft key to “Set Float Point”
When “Floating reference position return” option is provided.
Display of soft key to “Preset Work Coord.”
When “Workpiece coordinate system preset” option is provided.
-372-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
FS15 :
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Necessary setting to this screen
NC mode relating to this Parameter 2204#1 = 1 Use machine position and absolute position
screen
7613#0 = 1 Use dynamic display
7613#1 = 1 Use real speed display
7613#2 = 1 Use main spindle speed display
Axis name
Parameter 1020 = 88 X
= 89 Y
= 90 Z
= 85 U
= 86 V
= 87 W
= 65 A
= 66 B
= 67 C
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Parameter 1004#6 = 0 Displayed
= 1 Not displayed
Switch between inch/metric (for Relative, Absolute, Distance to Go)
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0010#0 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Switch between inch/metric (for Machine)
When “inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 1002#0 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Parameter 0012#0 = 0 Not use mirror image
= 1 Use mirror image
Displayed/Not displayed of “Distance to Go”
Always displayed.
Display of soft key to “Set Float Point”
When “Floating reference position return” option is provided.
Display of soft key to “Preset Work Coord.”
Always displayed.
-373-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
Power Mate :
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Setting for enabling screen display
NC mode relating to this None
screen
Axis name
Parameter 1020 = 88 X
= 89 Y
= 90 Z
= 85 U
= 86 V
= 87 W
= 65 A
= 66 B
= 67 C
Displayed/Not displayed of axis (Power Mate i-D/H only)
Parameter 3115#0 = 0 Displayed
= 1 Not displayed
Switch between inch/metric (for Relative position, Absolute position, Distance to Go)
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Switch between inch/metric (for Machine)
Parameter 1001#1 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Parameter 0012#0 = 0 Not use mirror image
= 1 Use mirror image
Displayed/Not displayed of "Distance to Go"
Except JOG mode Displayed
JOG mode
Not displayed
Display of soft key to "Set Floating Reference"
Not displayed
Display of soft key to "Preset Workpiece Coord."
Not displayed
-374-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
2 Relative Position Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Supported NC
Switch between inch/metric
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of soft key to “Set Float Point”
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of soft key to “Preset Work Coord.”
Refer to “Over All Position”.
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Necessary setting to this screen
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Axis name
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Switch between inch/metric
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of soft key to “Set Float Point”
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of soft key to “Preset Work Coord.”
Always displayed.
-375-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to "Over All Position".
screen
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to "Over All Position".
Switch between inch/metric
Refer to "Over All Position".
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to "Over All Position".
Display of soft key to "Set Floating Reference"
Not displayed
Display of soft key to "Preset Workpiece Coord."
Not displayed
3 Absolute Position Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Switch between inch/metric
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to “Over All Position”.
-376-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Necessary setting to this screen
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Axis name
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Switch between inch/metric
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to "Over All Position".
screen
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to "Over All Position".
Switch between inch/metric
Refer to "Over All Position".
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to "Over All Position".
Display of soft key to "Set Floating Reference"
Not displayed
Display of soft key to "Preset Workpiece Coord."
Not displayed
-377-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
4 Machine Position Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Supported NC
Switch between inch/metric
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to “Over All Position”.
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Necessary setting to this screen
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Axis name
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Switch between inch/metric
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to "Over All Position".
screen
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to "Over All Position".
Switch between inch/metric
Refer to "Over All Position".
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to "Over All Position".
-378-
B-62994EN/02
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
5 Distance to Go Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Supported NC
Switch between inch/metric
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Displayed/Not displayed of all axes
Except JOG mode Displayed
JOG mode
Not displayed
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Necessary setting to this screen
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Axis name
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Switch between inch/metric
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Displayed/Not displayed of all axes
Always displayed.
-379-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to "Over All Position".
screen
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to "Over All Position".
Switch between inch/metric
Refer to "Over All Position".
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to "Over All Position".
Displayed/Not displayed of all axes
Except JOG mode Displayed
JOG mode
Not displayed
6 Handle Interruption Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
Option
Handle interruption
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Switch between inch/metric
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of soft key to “Cancel Manual Overlap”
Parameter 7100#3 = 1
-380-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB
Option
Manual handle interruption
NC parameter setting or Necessary setting to this screen
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Axis name
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Switch between inch/metric
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0010#0 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Display of soft key to “Cancel Manual Overlap”
Always displayed.
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
Power Mate-H
:Manual handle interruption
Power Mate-D, Power Mate i-D/H :None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to "Over All Position".
screen
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to "Over All Position".
Switch between inch/metric
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to "Over All Position".
Display of soft key to “Cancel Manual Overlap” (Power Mate i-D/H only)
Parameter 7100#3 = 1
-381-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
7 Operating Monitor Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
Spindle serial output
Thread cutting, synchronous cutting (for M series)
NC parameter setting or Parameter 4001#2=1 (for M series)
NC mode relating to this
screen
Parameter 3111#6
0 Speedometer indicates spindle motor speed.
1 Speedometer indicates spindle speed.
Parameter
3151
Number of the axis for which the first load meter for the servo
motor is used.
:
:
3158 Number of the axis for which the eighth load meter for the
servo motor is used.
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
Spindle serial output
NC parameter setting or Parameter 2231 Number of the axis whose servo motor data is displayed on the
NC mode relating to this
1st load meter.
screen
2232 Number of the axis whose servo motor data is displayed on the
2nd load meter.
2233 Number of the axis whose servo motor data is displayed on the
3rd load meter.
2234 Rated load of the motor to be displayed on the load meter of
the 1st spindle.
2235 Rated load of the motor to be displayed on the 1st load meter
for the servo motor.
2236 Rated load of the motor to be displayed on the 2nd load meter
for the servo motor.
2237 Rated load of the motor to be displayed on the 3rd load meter
for the servo motor.
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
-382-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
8 Modal Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
9 Real Speed Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Switch between inch/metric
NC mode relating to this When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
screen
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Switch between inch/metric
NC mode relating to this When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
screen
Parameter 0010#0 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
-383-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Switch between inch/metric
NC mode relating to this Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
screen
= 1 inch
Display of spindle speed
Can be displayed only on Power Mate i-D.
10 Machining Time, Parts Count Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
Option
Run hour and parts count display
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
11 Program Edit Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Display of soft key to “Teach in”
NC mode relating to this When “Playback” option is provided and NC is in Teach in Handle or Teach in JOG mode.
screen
-384-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Display of soft key to “Teach in”
NC mode relating to this When “Playback” option is provided and NC is in Teach in Handle or Teach in JOG mode.
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Display of soft key to "Teach in"
NC mode relating to this When NC is in Teach in Handle or Teach in JOG mode
screen
12 MDI Program Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
-385-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
13 Program Directory Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Display of machining time at “List/Details”
NC mode relating to this When “Machine time stamp function” option is provided.
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Display of machining time at “List/Details”
NC mode relating to this When “Machine time stamp function” option is provided.
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Display of machining time in List (details)
NC mode relating to this Not displayed
screen
14 Program Check Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Necessary setting to this screen
NC mode relating to this
Parameter 7710#7 = 1 Use program check
screen
-386-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Setting for enabling screen display
NC mode relating to this None
screen
15 Current and Next Block Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Switch between inch/metric
NC mode relating to this When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
screen
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Switch between inch/metric
NC mode relating to this When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
screen
Parameter 0010#0 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Switch between inch/metric
NC mode relating to this Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
screen
= 1 inch
-387-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
16 Program Restart Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB, FS21i/210i-MA
NC Board-M
Option
Program restart
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Switch between inch/metric
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to “Over All Position”.
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB
Option
Program restart
NC parameter setting or Necessary setting to this screen
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Axis name
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Displayed/Not displayed of axis
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Switch between inch/metric
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0010#0 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Display of mirror image of the axis data
Refer to “Over All Position”.
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
-388-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
17 Stamping the Machining Time Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
Option
Machining time stamp function
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
Machining time stamp function
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
18 Basic Control Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
18.1 [Tool (Offset B Axis)] Screen
Supported NC
FS16/160-TB/TTB, FS16/160-TC/TTC, FS16i/160i-TA
FS18/180-TB/TTB, FS18/180-TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-TA
Option
B-axis control function
NC parameter setting or Tool shape and wear offset function
NC mode relating to this Function OFF → Screen of only offset data
screen
Function ON → Screen for displaying tool shape and wear offset data
Switch between inch/metric
When "Inch/metric conversion" option is provided,
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
The following table shows the units.
1004#1
1004#0
(ISC)
(ISA)
(IS-B)
0
0
(IS-C)
1
0
-389-
mm input
[mm]
0.001
inch input
[inch]
0.0001
0.0001
0.00001
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
18.2 [Program Check (B axis)] Screen
Supported NC
FS16/160-TB/TTB, FS16/160-TC/TTC, FS16i/160i-TA
FS18/180-TB/TTB, FS18/180-TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-TA
Option
B-axis control function
NC parameter setting or Switch between inch/metric
NC mode relating to this When "Inch/metric conversion" option is provided,
screen
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
The units used for travel distance are as follows:
Linear axis
1004#1
1004#0
mm input
(ISC)
(ISA)
[mm]
(IS-B)
0
0
0.001
(IS-C)
1
0
0.0001
Linear axis
inch input
[inch]
0.0001
Rotary axis
0.00001
0.0001
[deg]
0.001
A unit of speed is as follows:
G98[mm/min]
G99[mm/rev]
mm input
inch input
1
0.01
0.01
0.0001
(common to IS-B/IS-C)
FS15:
This function is not supported on the FS15.
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
-390-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
19 Setting(Handy) Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Display of “Input unit”
NC mode relating to this When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided.
screen
Kind of “Input unit”
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Display of “Tape Format”
When “Tape format for FS15” option is provided.
Kind of “Tape Format”
Parameter 0001#1 = 0 Series 16 standard format
= 1 Series 15 format
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Display of “Input unit”
NC mode relating to this When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided.
screen
Kind of “Input unit”
Parameter 0010#0 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Note:
Kind of “Input device”
Parameter 0020 = 16 MMC download interface
(must be set to this value when Program Edit screen on BOP1 is used.)
Kind of “Input device(BG.EDIT)”
Parameter 0022 = 16 MMC download interface
(must be set to this value when Program Edit screen on BOP1 is used.)
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or "Input unit" type
NC mode relating to this Parameter 0000#2 = 0 mm
screen
= 1 inch
Display of "Tape Format" item
Not displayed
-391-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
20 Setting(Timer) Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
21 Tool Offset Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Switch between inch/metric
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
-392-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
Display of tool offset memory A (for M series)
Basic function
Display of tool offset memory B (for M series)
When “Tool offset memory B” option is provided.
Display of tool offset memory C (for M series)
When “Tool offset memory C” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 16 pairs (for M series)
Basic function
Display of tool offset of 64 pairs (for M series)
When “Tool offset pairs 64-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 99 pairs (for M series)
When “Tool offset pairs 99-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 200 pairs (for M series)
When “Tool offset pairs 200-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 400 pairs (for M series)
When “Tool offset pairs 400-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 499 pairs (for M series)
When “Tool offset pairs 499-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 999 pairs (for M series)
When “Tool offset pairs 999-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset memory A (for T series)
Basic function
Display of tool offset memory B (for T series)
When “Tool offset memory B” option is provided.
Display of radius and TIP offset (for T series)
When “Tool nose radius compensation” option is provided
Display of Y-axis offset (for T series)
When “Y-axis offset” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 16 pairs (for T series)
Basic function
Display of tool offset of 32 pairs (for T series)
When “Tool offset pairs 32-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 64 pairs (for T series)
When “Tool offset pairs 64-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 99 pairs (for T series)
When “Tool offset pairs 99-pairs” option is provided.
-393-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to “Over All Position”.
screen
Switch between inch/metric
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0010#0 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Display of tool offset memory A (for M series)
Basic function
Display of tool offset memory B (for M series)
When “Tool offset memory B” option is provided.
Display of tool offset memory C (for M series)
When “Tool offset memory C” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 32 pairs (for M series)
Basic function
Display of tool offset of 99 pairs (for M series)
When “Tool offset pairs 99-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 200 pairs (for M series)
When “Tool offset pairs 200-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 499 pairs (for M series)
When “Tool offset pairs 499-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 999 pairs (M series)
When “Tool offset pairs 999-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset memory A (for T series)
Basic function
Display of tool offset memory B (for T series)
When “Tool offset memory B” option is provided.
Display of radius and TIP offset (for T series)
When “Tool nose radius compensation” option is provided.
Display of Y-axis offset (for T series)
When Y-axis is set in the axis name.
Display of tool offset of 32 pairs (for T series)
Basic function
Display of tool offset of 64 pairs (for T series)
When “Tool offset pairs 64-pairs” option is provided.
Display of tool offset of 160 pairs (for T series)
When “Tool offset pairs 160-pairs” option is provided.
-394-
B-62994EN/02
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Axis name
NC mode relating to this Refer to "Over All Position".
screen
Switch between inch/metric
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Display of memory type A
Basic function
Display of tool offset of 99 pairs
Basic function
22 Custom Macro Variables Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
Custom macro B
NC parameter setting or Display of common variables 100-149th and 500-531st
NC mode relating to this Basic function
screen
Display of common variables 100-199th and 500-999th
When “Addition of custom macro common variables” option is provided.
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
Custom macro
NC parameter setting or Display of common variables 100-149th and 500-549th
NC mode relating to this Basic function
screen
Display of common variables 100-199th and 500-599th
When “Custom macro common variables 200” option is provided.
Display of common variables 100-199th and 500-699th
When “Custom macro common variables 300” option is provided.
Display of common variables 100-199th and 500-999th
When “Custom macro common variables 600” option is provided.
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Display of common variables 100-199th and 500-699th
NC mode relating to this Basic function
screen
-395-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
23 Work Origin Offset Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB, FS21i/210i-MA
NC Board-M
Option
Workpiece coordinate system
NC parameter setting or The number of coordinate system pairs is changed according to
NC mode relating to this “Addition of workpiece coordinate system 48-pairs” option and
screen
“Addition of workpiece coordinate system 300-pairs” option, at the following
NCs.
FS160 Model-B,C,FS160i M/MM
FS180 Model-B,C,FS180i M
Switch between inch/metric
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Kind of units of offset value is as follows:
linear axis linear axis rotary axis
1004#1
1004#0
mm input
inch input
(ISC)
(ISA)
[mm]
[inch]
(IS-B)
0
0
0.001
0.0001
(IS-C)
1
0
0.0001
0.00001
[deg]
0.001
0.0001
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
Work zero offset direct input
NC parameter setting or Switch between inch/metric
NC mode relating to this When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
screen
Parameter 0010#0 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Kind of units of offset value is as follows:
(IS-A)
(IS-B)
(IS-C)
(IS-D)
(IS-E)
1009#1
(ISE)
0
0
0
0
1
1004#5
(ISD)
0
0
0
1
0
1004#1
(ISF)
0
0
1
0
0
1004#0
(ISR)
1
0
0
0
0
linear axis
mm input
[mm]
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
linear axis
inch input
[inch]
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
0.0000001
When the parameter 1004#2 is set to 1, above-mentioned units except IS-A are
increased by ten times.
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
-396-
rotary axis
[deg]
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
24 Tool Life Management Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB, FS21i/210i-MA
NC Board-M
Option
Tool life management
NC parameter setting or Additional option setting
NC mode relating to this Addition of tool pairs for tool life management (total 512-sets, for M series)
screen
Addition of tool pairs for tool life management (total 128-sets, for T series)
Number of tool groups and number of tools per one group
According to the parameter 6800#0, #1 settings like as follows:
6800#1
6800#0
M series
T series
(GS2)
(GS1)
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
groups
tools
groups
tools
0
0
1... 16
1... 16
1... 16
1... 16
1... 64
1... 32
1... 16
1... 32
0
1
1... 32
1... 8
1... 32
1... 8
1...128
1... 16
1... 32
1... 16
1
0
1... 64
1... 4
1... 64
1... 4
1...256
1... 8
1... 64
1... 8
1
1
1...128
1... 2
1... 16
1... 16
1...512
1... 4
1...128
1... 4
* The values on the lower row in the table apply when “Addition of tool pairs
for tool life management” option is provided.
Count type of tool life management
Parameter 6800#2 = 0 Specified by the number of times
= 1 Specified by the time
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
Tool life management
NC parameter setting or Additional option setting
NC mode relating to this Tool pair for tool life management : 512 pairs
screen
Number of tool groups and number of tools per one group
According to the parameter 7400#0, #1 settings like as follows:
7400#1
7400#0
Option nothing
Option exist
(GS2)
(GS1)
Number of
Number of
Number of
groups
tools
groups
0
0
1... 16
1... 16
1... 64
0
1
1... 32
1... 8
1...128
1
0
1... 64
1... 4
1...256
1
1
1...128
1... 2
1...512
Count type of tool life management
Parameter 7400#3 = 0 Specified by the number of times
= 1 Specified by the time
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
-397-
Number of
tools
1... 32
1... 16
1... 8
1... 4
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
25 Workpiece Shift Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-TB/TTB, FS16/160-TC/TTC, FS16i/160i-TA
FS18/180-TB/TTB, FS18/180-TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-TA
FS21/210-TB, FS21i/210i-TA
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Displayed/Not displayed of this screen
NC mode relating to this Parameter 1201#6=0 Displayed
screen
=1 Not displayed
Axis name
Refer to “Over All Position”
Parameter 3134
Specifies the order in which axis are displayed
on the workpiece coordinate system screen.
Parameter 3290#3 Setting a workpiece zero offset value by MDI
key input is :
0
Not disabled
1
Disabled
Switch between inch/metric
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Kind of units of shift value is as follows:
1004#1
1004#0
(ISC)
(ISA)
(IS-B)
0
0
(IS-C)
1
0
FS15 :
FS15 does not have this function.
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
-398-
mm input
[mm]
0.001
0.0001
inch input
[inch]
0.0001
0.00001
B-62994EN/02
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
26 Operator’s Panel Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
Software operator’s panel
Software operator’s panel general purpose switch
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB
Option
Software operator’s panel
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Setting for enabling function
NC mode relating to this Parameter 7200#0 = 1 Mode selection used
screen
#1 = 1 Manual feed function used
#2 = 1 Manual pulse generator used
#3 = 1 Override used
#4 = 1 Block delete, single block, machine lock, dryrun used
#5 = 1 Protect key used
#6 = 1 Feed hold used
Display of software operator's panel (Power Mate i-D/H only)
Parameter 7202#7 = 0 Displayed
= 1 Not displayed
Display of software operator's panel general purpose switch (Power Mate i-D/H only)
Parameter 7202#6 = 0 Displayed
= 1 Not displayed
-399-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
27 P code Macro Variable Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
Option
Macro executer
Size of main CPU custom software
Size of sub CPU custom software (when two-path control is used)
The following conditions must also be satisfied:
The object of P-CODE macro is loaded.
Executer parameter 9000#1 = 1
NC parameter setting or Type of P-CODE variables 1
NC mode relating to this Always floating decimal point format.
screen
Type of P-CODE variables 2
When "High-speed cycle cutting" option is NOT provided,
Compiling parameter 9002#3 = 0 Floating decimal point format (from 20000th)
= 1 Integer format (from 20000th)
When "High-speed cycle cutting" option is provided,
Integer format (from 200000th)
Number of P-CODE variables 1
(Value of compiling parameter 9037) × 100
Number of P-CODE variables 2
When "High-speed cycle cutting" option is NOT provided,
(Value of compiling parameter 9044) × 12 (for floating decimal point format)
(Value of compiling parameter 9044) × 30 (for integer format)
When "High-speed cycle cutting" option is provided,
65536 (Basic)
131071 (when "High-speed cycle data additional variables A" option is provided)
262143 (when "High-speed cycle data additional variables B" option is provided)
-400-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
FS15:
Supported NC
Option
FS15/150-MB/TB
Custom macro
Macro Executer & compiler
The following conditions must also be satisfied:
The object of P-CODE macro is loaded
Executer parameter 8502#4 = 1
NC parameter setting or Type of P-CODE variables 1
NC mode relating to this Compiling parameter 8509#1 = 0 Floating decimal point format
screen
= 1 Integer format
Type of P-CODE variables 2
Compiling parameter 8509#0 = 0 Floating decimal point format
= 1 Integer format
Number of P-CODE variables 1
(Value of compiling parameter 8549) × 100
Number of P-CODE variables 2
(Value of compiling parameter 8550) × 10 (for floating decimal point format)
(Value of compiling parameter 8550) × 30 (for integer format)
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Option
Power Mate i-D/H
Macro executer
Size of main CPU custom software
Size of sub CPU custom software (when two-path control is used)
The following conditions must also be satisfied:
The object of P-CODE macro is loaded.
Executer parameter 9000#1 = 1
NC parameter setting or Type of P-CODE variables 1
NC mode relating to this Always floating decimal point format.
screen
Type of P-CODE variables 2
Compiling parameter 9002#3 = 0 Floating decimal point format (from 20000th)
= 1 Integer format (from 20000th)
Number of P-CODE variables 1
(Value of compiling parameter 9037) × 100
Number of P-CODE variables 2
(Value of compiling parameter 9044) × 12 (for floating decimal point format)
(Value of compiling parameter 9044) × 30 (for integer format)
-401-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
28 Chopping Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/MMB, FS16/160-MC/MMC, FS16i/160i-MA
FS18/180-MB, FS18/180-MC, FS18i/180i-MA
Option
Chopping function
NC parameter setting or Parameter 8360#7=1 Chopping speed can not be set.
NC mode relating to this
screen
Switch between inch/metric
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Speed display is changed according to the following setting :
1004#1
1004#0
mm input
(ISC)
(ISA)
[mm/min]
(IS-B)
0
0
0 .. 240000
(IS-C)
1
0
0 .. 100000
inch input
[inch/min]
0 .. 9600
0 .. 4800
Kind of units is as follows:
(IS-B)
(IS-C)
1004#1
(ISC)
0
1
1004#0
(ISA)
0
0
mm input
[mm]
0.001
0.0001
inch input
[inch]
0.0001
0.00001
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB
Option
Chopping function
NC parameter setting or Parameter 1001#7=1 Chopping axis and chopping speed can not be set.
NC mode relating to this
screen
Switch between inch/metric
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0010#0 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Kind of units is as follows:
1009#1 1004#5
(ISE)
(ISD)
(IS-A)
0
0
(IS-B)
0
0
(IS-C)
0
0
(IS-D)
0
1
(IS-E)
1
0
1004#1
(ISF)
0
0
1
0
0
1004#0
(ISR)
1
0
0
0
0
mm input
[mm]
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
inch input
[inch]
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
0.0000001
When the parameter 1004#2 is set to 1, above-mentioned units except IS-A are
increased by ten times.
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
-402-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
29 Chuck and Tailstock Barriers Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-TB/TTB, FS16/160-TC/TTC, FS16i/160i-TA
FS18/180-TB/TTB, FS18/180-TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-TA
FS21/210-TB, FS21i/210i-TA
Option
Chuck and tailstock barrier
NC parameter setting or Display type
NC mode relating to this Parameter 1330 = 0 Inner surface display
screen
= 1 Outer surface display
Switch between inch/metric
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Kind of units is as follows:
1004#1
(ISC)
0
1
(IS-B)
(IS-C)
1004#0
(ISA)
0
0
mm input
[mm]
0.001
0.0001
inch input
[inch]
0.0001
0.00001
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-TB/TTB
Option
Chuck and tailstock barrier
NC parameter setting or Display type
NC mode relating to this Parameter 5230 = 0 Inner surface display
screen
= 1 Outer surface display
Switch between inch/metric
When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
Parameter 0010#0 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Kind of units is as follows:
1009#1
1004#5
(ISE)
(ISD)
(IS-A) 0
0
(IS-B)
(IS-C)
(IS-D)
(IS-E)
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1004#1
(ISF)
0
1004#0
(ISR)
1
mm input
[mm]
0.01
inch input
[inch]
0.001
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
0.0000001
When the parameter 1004#2 is set to 1, above-mentioned units except IS-A are
increased by ten times.
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
-403-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
30 Tool Post Interference Check Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board
Supported NC
FS16/160-TTB, FS16/160-TTC, FS16i/160i-TA (w/ two-path control function)
FS18/180-TTB, FS18/180-TTC, FS18i/180i-TA (w/ two-path control function)
Option
Tool post interference check function
NC parameter setting or Switch between inch/metric
NC mode relating to this When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
screen
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Kind of units is as follows:
1004#1
(ISC)
(IS-B)
0
(IS-C)
1
1004#0
(ISA)
0
mm input
[mm]
0.001
inch input
[inch]
0.0001
0
0.0001
0.00001
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-TTB
Option
Tool post interference check
NC parameter setting or Switch between inch/metric
NC mode relating to this When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
screen
Parameter 0010#0 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Kind of units is as follows:
1009#1 1004#5
(ISE)
(ISD)
(IS-A)
0
0
(IS-B)
0
0
(IS-C)
0
0
(IS-D)
0
1
(IS-E)
1
0
1004#1
(ISF)
0
0
1
0
1004#0
(ISR)
1
0
0
0
mm input
[mm]
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch input
[inch]
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
0
0
0.000001
0.0000001
When the parameter 1004#2 is set to 1, above-mentioned units except IS-A are
increased by ten times.
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
-404-
B-62994EN/02
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
31 Two Paths Interference Check Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board
Supported NC
FS16/160-MMB, FS16/160-MMC, FS16i/160i-MA (w/ two-path control function)
Option
Two paths interference check function
NC parameter setting or Switch between inch/metric
NC mode relating to this When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
screen
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
A setting range is as follows:
(IS-B)
(IS-C)
1004#1
(ISC)
0
1
1004#0
(ISA)
0
0
mm input
[mm]
+/- 99999.999
+/- 9999.9999
inch input
[inch]
+/- 3937.0078
+/- 393.70078
FS15 :
FS15 does not have this function.
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
32 Parameter Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
-405-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
33 Diagnosis Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
34 System Configuration Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
-406-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
35 Data Input/Output Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
Settings required for None
changing screen display
details
36 Pitch Error Compensation Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
Stored pitch error compensation
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
-407-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
Stored pitch error compensation
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate i-D
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
37 Servo Setting/Tuning Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
-408-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
38 Spindle Setting/Tuning Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
Spindle serial output
Thread cutting, synchronous cutting (for M series)
NC parameter setting or Additional option settings :
NC mode relating to this Spindle orientation
screen
Rigid tap
Cs contouring control
Spindle positioning (for T series)
Multi spindle control (for T series)
Spindle Name
First spindle
F64#1
Second spindle
F50#1
Third spindle
F169#1
=0
=1
=0
=1
=0
=1
Displayed as “S11”
Displayed as “S12”
Displayed as “S21”
Displayed as “S22”
Displayed as “S31”
Displayed as “S32”
Select Gear
Changed by the combination of the PMC signals, “CTH1” and “CTH2”.
CTH1
0
CTH2
0
Display
1.High
0
1
2.Mid.High
1
0
3.Mid.Low
1
1
4.Low
Operation
Changed by the NC program execution. The displayed “Operation” is one of
the followings.
“Speed Control”,
“Orientation”,
“Sync. Control”,
“Rigid Tapping”,
“Cs Contouring”,
“Positioning” (for only T series).
Kind of speed display
Parameter 4001#2 =1 (for M series)
When “Operation” is “Positioning” or “Cs Contouring”,
“Feed speed (deg/min)”
otherwise,
“Spindle speed (rpm)
-409-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
Spindle Tuning Parameter
Changed by the “Operation”.
Contents
Proportional gain
Condition
Basic
Integral gain
Basic
Loop gain
Motor voltage
ORAR gain
Regenerative power
Stop position shift
Acc./Dcc.time constant
ZRN gain
Except “Speed Control” mode
Basic
“Orientation” mode
“Speed Control” mode
“Orientation” mode
“Sync. Control” mode
Except the above-mentioned
kinds of “Operation”
Except “Speed Control” mode
Reference point shift
* One of “Regenerative power”, “Stop position shift”, “Acc./Dcc.
time constant”, “ZRN gain” is displayed according to the “Operation”.
Position error 1
Changed by the “Operation”.
Contents
Not displayed
Position error S1
Position error S
Condition
“Speed Control” mode
“Sync. Control” mode
Except the above-mentioned kinds of
“Operation”
Position error 2
Changed by the “Operation”.
Contents
Position error Z
Position error S2
Not displayed
Condition
“Rigid Tapping” mode
“Sync. Control” mode
Except the above-mentioned kinds of
“Operation”
Sync. error
Displayed only when the “Operation” is “Sync. Control” or ”Rigid Tapping”.
Spindle Setting Parameter
Changed by the selected spindle.
Contents
Gear ratio
Max motor speed
Max C axis speed
Max spindle speed
Condition
Basic
Basic
First spindle
First spindle
-410-
B-62994EN/02
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
Spindle serial output
NC parameter setting or Additional option settings :
NC mode relating to this Orientation
screen
Rigid tap
Cs contouring control
Spindle Name
First spindle
5606#0=0
First spindle does not exist
=1
First spindle exists
Second spindle 5606#1=0
Second spindle does not exist
=1
Second spindle exists
If spindle does not exist, spindle name is not displayed.
If spindle exists:
First spindle
3014#0 = 0
=1
Second spindle 3154#0 = 0
=1
without Sub ... Displayed as “S11”
with Sub
... See below
without Sub ... Displayed as “S21”
with Sub
... See below
If Sub exists:
First spindle
G226#2,F228#0,#1 = All “0” ... Displayed as “S11”
= All “1” ... Displayed as “S12”
Second spindle G234#2,F224#0,#1 = All “0” ... Displayed as “S21”
= All “1” ... Displayed as “S22”
* If the bit status is not as the above-mentioned, it means that the spindle
change is in progress.
Select Gear
Changed by the combination of the PMC signals, “CTH1” and “CTH2”.
CTH1
0
CTH2
0
Display
1.High
0
1
1
1
0
1
2.Mid.High
3.Mid.Low
4.Low
Operation
Changed by the NC program execution.
of the followings.
“Speed Control”,
“Orientation”,
“Sync. Control”,
“Rigid Tapping”,
“Cs Contouring”,
“Positioning” (for only T series).
The displayed “Operation” is one
Kind of speed display
When “Operation” is “Positioning” or “Cs Contouring”,
“Feed speed (deg/min)”
otherwise,
“Spindle speed (rpm)”
-411-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
Spindle Tuning Parameter
Changed by the “Operation”.
Contents
Proportional gain
Condition
Basic
Integral gain
Basic
Loop gain
Motor voltage
ORAR gain
Regenerative power
Stop position shift
Acc./Dcc.time constant
ZRN gain
Except “Speed Control” mode
Basic
“Orientation” mode
“Speed Control” mode
“Orientation” mode
“Sync. Control” mode
Except the above-mentioned
kinds of “Operation”
Except “Speed Control” mode
Reference point shift
* One of “Regenerative power”, “Stop position shift”, “Acc./Dcc.
time constant”, “ZRN gain” is displayed according to the “Operation”.
Position error 1
Changed by the “Operation”.
Contents
Not displayed
Position error S1
Position error S
Condition
“Speed Control” mode
“Sync. Control” mode
Except the above-mentioned kinds of
“Operation”
Position error 2
Changed by the “Operation”.
Contents
Position error Z
Position error S2
Not displayed
Condition
“Rigid Tapping” mode
“Sync. Control” mode
Except the above-mentioned kinds of
“Operation”
Sync. error
Displayed only when the “Operation” is “Sync. Control” or ”Rigid
Tapping”.
Spindle Setting Parameter
Changed by the selected spindle.
Contents
Gear ratio
Max motor speed
Max C axis speed
Max spindle speed
Condition
Basic
Basic
Selected main
Write protected
-412-
B-62994EN/02
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate i-D
Option
Spindle serial output
NC parameter setting or Spindle orientation
NC mode relating to this Rigid tapping
screen
Spindle Name
First spindle F64#1 = 0 Displayed as "S11"
= 1 Displayed as "S12"
Select Gear
Changed by the combination of the PMC signals, "CTH1" and "CTH2".
CTH1
0
CTH2
0
Display
1.High
0
1
1
1
0
1
2.Mid.High
3.Mid.Low
4.Low
Operation mode
Changed by the NC program execution. The displayed "Operation Mode" is one of
the followings.
"Speed Control"
"Orientation",
"Sync. Control",
"Rigid Tapping"
Type of speed display
Parameter 4001#2 = 1
"Spindle speed (rpm)" is displayed.
Spindle Tuning Parameter
Changed by the "Operation Mode".
Contents
Proportional gain
Condition
Basic
Integral gain
Basic
Loop gain
Motor voltage
ORAR gain
Regenerative power
Stop position shift
Acc./Dcc. time constant
ZRN gain
Reference position shift
Except "Speed Control" mode
Basic
"Orientation" mode
"Speed Control" mode
"Orientation" mode
"Sync. Control" mode
Except the above-mentioned types of "Operation Mode"
Except "Speed Control" mode
∗ One of "Regenerative power", "Stop position shift", "Acc./Dcc. time constant", "ZRN gain"
is displayed according to the "Operation Mode".
-413-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
Position error 1
Changed by the "Operation Mode".
Contents
Not displayed
Position error S1
Position error S
Condition
"Speed Control" mode
"Sync. Control" mode
Except the above-mentioned types of "Operation Mode"
Position error 2
Changed by the "Operation Mode".
Contents
Position error Z
Position error S2
Not displayed
Condition
"Rigid Tapping" mode
"Sync. Control" mode
Except the above-mentioned types of "Operation Mode"
Sync. error
Displayed only when the "Operation Mode" is "Sync. Control" or "Rigid Tapping".
Spindle Setting Parameter
Changed by the selected spindle.
Contents
Gear ratio
Max. motor speed
Max. C axis speed
Max. spindle speed
Condition
Basic
Basic
First spindle
First spindle
39 [Waveform Diagnosis setting] [Waveform Diagnosis graph] Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Parameter 3112#0 = 0 Do not display Waveform Diagnosis Screen.
NC mode relating to this
= 1 Display Waveform Diagnosis Screen.
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15 Model-B M/T/TT
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
-414-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
40 Operation History Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Parameter 3106#4 = 1
NC mode relating to this Parameter 3112#5 = 0
screen
Parameter 3110#4 = 0 Do not display soft key "Delete".
= 1 Display soft key "Delete".
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Parameter 0015#3 = 1
NC mode relating to this
screen
Parameter 0015#4 = 0 Do not display soft key "Delete".
= 1 Display soft key "Delete".
Parameter 0013#5 = 0 Do not display soft key "Signal Select".
= 1 Display soft key "Signal Select".
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Parameter 3106#4 = 1
NC mode relating to this Parameter 3112#5 = 0
screen
41 PMC Screens
([PMC Status], [PMC Alarm], [PMC Counter], [PMC Timer], [PMC Keep relay], [PMC Data] Screen)
PMC
FS16/18/21/NC Board : all types of PMC-RB/RC
FS15
: PMC-NB/NB2
Power Mate
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
-415-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
B-62994EN/02
42 Alarm Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or Parameter 7613#0=1 (Must be set)
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
43 Operator Message Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
NC Board-M/T
Option
External message
External data input
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
External data input/output
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
-416-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
44 Alarm History Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16/160-MB/TB/MMB/TTB, FS16/160-MC/TC/MMC/TTC, FS16i/160i-MA/TA
FS18/180-MB/TB/TTB, FS18/180-MC/TC/TTC, FS18i/180i-MA/TA
FS21/210-MB/TB, FS21i/210i-MA/TA
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
FS15:
Supported NC
FS15/150-MB/TB/TTB
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
Power Mate:
Supported NC
Power Mate-D/H
Power Mate i-D/H
Option
None (Basic)
NC parameter setting or None
NC mode relating to this
screen
-417-
APPENDIX 1 REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
45 Milling Animation Screen
FS16/18/21/NC Board :
Supported NC
FS16i/160i-MA
FS18i/180i-MA
Option
Milling animation function
NC parameter setting or Switch between inch/metric
NC mode relating to this When “Inch/metric conversion” option is provided,
screen
Parameter 0000#2 = 0 metric
= 1 inch
Kind of units is as follows:
1004#1
(ISC)
(IS-B)
0
(IS-C)
1
1004#0
(ISA)
0
0
FS15 :
FS15 does not have this function.
Power Mate:
This function is not supported on the Power Mate.
-418-
mm input
[mm]
0.001
0.0001
inch input
[inch]
0.0001
0.00001
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 2 BACKING UP THE SETTING FILE
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX
2
BACKING UP THE SETTING FILE
This section describes the setting file.
The settings for Basic Operation Package 1 are stored at the location
indicated below. A backup copy of the original information should be kept to
guard against errors.
l Storage location of the WIN32 version
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\VB and Program Settings\WinBOP?]
key
and
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\VB
and
Program
Settings\WinBOPl?] key of the registry (? represents a numeric or blank
character.)
The registry file can be saved by choosing [Registry] and [Export
Registry File ...] of the registry editor (REGEDIT.EXE) in the Windows
directory.
l Storage location of the WIN16 version
WINBOP.INI and WINBOPL.INI files in the Windows directory
-419-
APPENDIX 3 CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL
APPENDIX
3
B-62994EN/02
CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL
This section describes the creation of an ActiveX control.
The CNC screen of Basic O/peration Package 1 are COM objects that support
visual editing. This CNC screen also has automation functions (property,
method, event), which will be described later. The CNC screen is usually
created as an ActiveX control which is an inproc ActiveX component. The
screen can be used with Visual Basic or Internet Explorer.
Process
Property, method
Inproc
ActiveX
component
ActiveX
container
Event
The screen object supports applications with the following automation
functions:
[Method]
• DoFunction (Index As Integer)
Calls a CNC-screen function having the specified Index number.
When the function number is specified as an argument of the
DoFunction method, the corresponding CNC function is called. The
DoFunction method function lists, described later, indicate the
correspondence between the screen function numbers and functions.
[Properties]
• FunctionName (Index As Integer) As String
Obtains the function name corresponding to the function number
specified for Index of DoFunction. When the function number of the
DoFunction method is specified as an argument, the corresponding
function name can be obtained. For a function which requires the
function option, if the function option is not specified on the CNC
side, the FunctionName property will return a null character string
("").
-420-
APPENDIX 3 CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL
B-62994EN/02
• Node As Integer
Obtains and sets a node number for the High Speed Serial Bus
multiple connection. This property can be set only in the design mode.
• Path As Integer
Obtains and sets the current path of the CNC screen. When 1 is set for
the Path property, path 1 is accessed. When 2 is set for the Path
property, path 2 is accessed. The setting for the loader control board
is 5.
• NcOption As Boolean
Indicates whether the CNC has a function corresponding to the CNC
screen. When the CNC screen does not require any options, this
property always returns True. If the CNC screen requires options and
if all the necessary options are set, the property returns True. If some
options are not set, the property returns False.
• LcOption As Boolean
Indicates whether the CNC screen supports the function of the loader
control board. If the loader control board supports the function for
this CNC screen, this property returns True. Otherwise, the property
returns False. This property is independent of the Path property.
• BackColor
Obtains and sets the background color of a CNC screen.
[Event]
• FunctionChanged
Reports that the contents of the DoFunction method have been
changed according to the CNC status or operation.
-421-
APPENDIX 3 CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL
B-62994EN/02
l DoFunction method function lists
• Position display
Function
number
Function
1
Originate relative position
2
Preset relative position
3
Set floating reference point
4
Preset workpiece coordinate system
• Handle interruption
Function
number
1
Function
Cancel manual overlap
• Operating monitor
No functions
• Modal
No functions
• Actual speed
No functions
• Machining time and work count
Function
number
Function
1
Clear machining work count
2
Clear operation time
-422-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 3 CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL
• Program editing
Function
number
Function
1
Get program from NC
2
Write program back to NC
3
Include program from disk
4
Write program onto disk
6
Search for character string
7
Replace character string
10
Switch status of area
11
Cut
12
Copy
13
Paste
14
Insert sequence number
15
Teach in
16
Move to top
17
Move to bottom
18
Insert time
• MDI program
Function
number
Function
6
Search for character string
7
Replace character string
10
Switch status of area
11
Cut
12
Copy
13
Paste
14
Insert sequence number
15
Move to top
16
Move to bottom
• Program directory
Function
number
Function
1
Copy program
2
Erase program
3
Rename program
4
View list or details
-423-
APPENDIX 3 CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL
B-62994EN/02
• Program check
Function
number
Function
1
Find specific item
2
Search for sequence number
• Current block/Next block
No functions
• Program restart
Function
number
Function
1
Search for restart block
2
Set axis movement sequence for restart position
• Machining time
No functions
• Program check (B-axis)
No functions
• Setting (handy)
Function
number
7
Function
+ Input
• Setting (timer)
Function
number
7
Function
+ Input
• Tool offset
Function
number
Function
1
Select tool length screen (M type)
1
Select geometry screen (T type)
2
Select tool radius screen (M type)
2
Select wear screen (T type)
6
Number search
7
+ Input
8
Clear tool offset data
9
Counter input
10
Direct input of measured value (T type)
-424-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 3 CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL
• Custom macro variable
Function
number
Function
1
Select local variable screen
2
Select common variable 1 screen
3
Select common variable 2 screen
6
Number search
7
+ Input
8
Clear variable
9
Counter input
10
Input empty
• Workpiece origin offset
Function
number
Function
6
Number search
7
+ Input
10
Direct input of measured value
• Tool life management
Function
number
Function
1
View details (when viewing groups)
6
Number search (when viewing groups)
7
Edit life counter (when viewing groups)
1
View groups (when viewing details)
3
Add tool (M type) (when viewing details)
4
Delete tool (M type) (when viewing details)
5
Change status (when viewing details)
7
Edit life counter (when viewing details)
• Work shift
Function
number
7
Function
+ Input
• Operator's panel
No functions
-425-
APPENDIX 3 CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL
B-62994EN/02
• P-code variable
Function
number
Function
1
Select local variable screen
2
Select common variable 1 screen
3
Select common variable 2 screen
4
Select P-code variable 1 screen
5
Select P-code variable 2 screen
6
Number search
10
Input empty
• Chopping
Function
number
Function
7
+ Input
10
Set absolute position
• Chuck and tailstock barriers
Function
number
Function
1
View chuck or tailstock
2
Change inside or outside of grip
7
+ Input
10
Set absolute coordinates
• Tool offset (B axis)
No functions
• Tool Post Interference Check
Function
number
Function
6
Number search
7
+ Input
• 2-path Interference Check
Function
number
7
Function
+ Input
• Parameter
Function
number
Function
6
Number search
7
+ Input
-426-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 3 CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL
• Diagnosis
Function
number
6
Function
Number search
• System configuration
No functions
• Data input/output
Function
number
Function
1
Setting
2
Read
3
Punch
6
Directory
7
Delete
8
Change file name
• Pitch error compensation
Function
number
6
Function
Number search
• Servo setting
Function
number
7
Function
+ Input
• Servo tuning
Function
number
7
Function
+ Input
• Spindle setting
Function
number
7
Function
+ Input
• Spindle tuning
Function
number
7
Function
+ Input
-427-
APPENDIX 3 CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL
B-62994EN/02
• Wave diagnosis setting
Function
number
Function
1
Set sampling data
2
Start sampling
3
Stop sampling
• Wave diagnosis graph
Function
number
Function
1
View wave display 1 or 2
2
Select wave data
3
Store wave data
4
Zoom in wave
5
Zoom out wave
6
Zoom in time
7
Zoom out time
• Operation history
Function
number
Function
1
Switch to signal selection settings (when the operation history
is displayed)
7
Top (when the operation history is displayed)
8
Bottom (when the operation history is displayed)
1
Switch to operation history (when the signal selection settings
are displayed)
7
All clear (when the signal selection settings are displayed)
8
Clear (when the signal selection settings are displayed)
• PMC status
Function
number
6
Function
Address search
• PMC alarm
No functions
• PMC counter
No functions
• PMC timer
No functions
-428-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 3 CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL
• PMC keep relay
No functions
• PMC data
Function
number
Function
1
View data (when viewing groups)
2
Set group count (when viewing groups)
5
Initialize (when viewing groups)
6
Group number search (when viewing groups)
1
View groups (when viewing data)
6
Data number search (when viewing data)
• Alarm
No functions
• Operator message
No functions
• Alarm history
Function
number
6
Function
Delete
• Tool (milling animation function)
Function
number
Function
1
Register
2
Delete
6
File
7
Save
• Machining (milling animation function)
Function
number
Function
1
Start
3
Stop
6
Setting
-429-
APPENDIX 4 SWITCHING THE MESSAGE LANGUAGE
APPENDIX
4
B-62994EN/02
SWITCHING THE MESSAGE LANGUAGE
This section describes the switching of the language in which messages are
displayed.
lSwitching the language
Basic Operation Package 1 can be installed with multiple language
environments, allowing screens to be displayed in any desired language.
This, however, does not mean that any language environment can be used
with Windows of any version. For example, the Japanese environment can
be used only on a system on which the Japanese version of Windows is
running. IME is needed to input Japanese and Japanese fonts are needed to
display Japanese characters. The caret must be placed appropriately.
Basic Operation Package 1 is initially installed with the English-language
environment. If Basic Operation Package 1 is placed in the C:\BOP folder,
the English-language message files are set in the C:\BOP\MESSAGE folder
and the English INI files in the C:\BOP\INI folder, as indicated below:
C:\BOP
\Message
(English message files)
\Ini
(English INI files)
A new language environment can be created by creating new subfolders for
message files and INI files in C:\BOP. To create the Japanese-language
environment, for example, create the following subfolders:
C:\BOP
\Message
(English message files)
\Ini
(English INI files)
\Jpnmsg
(Japanese message files)
\Jpnini
(Japanese INI files)
Copy the message files and INI files and set the subfolder information in the
Basic Operation Package. Then, the Japanese-language environment can be
used.
-430-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 4 SWITCHING THE MESSAGE LANGUAGE
NOTE
l The message files and INI files can be placed in a single folder
l The folders containing the English message files and English INI
files can neither be deleted nor renamed.
• Message file
This binary file stores the messages that can be displayed. The message
file can be created by the message file generator provided with Basic
Operation Package 1. For an explanation of the procedure for creating
the message file, see Appendix 4, "Message File Generator."
• INI file
This text file stores the messages that can be displayed on the
[Parameter] screen and [Diagnosis] screen and the messages output upon
the occurrence of an NC alarm or PMC alarm. The messages can be
displayed in the desired language by replacing that part enclosed by a
pair of double quotation marks ("") with the desired language.
lAdding a desired language environment
A desired language environment can be added to the Basic Operation
Package either manually or by using ADDLANG.EXE, an installer.
NOTE
Before adding a desired language environment, activate and
terminate Basic Operation Package 1 at least once.
For an
explanation of how to activate and terminate Basic Operation
Package 1, see Section 2.1, "Starting and Terminating Basic
Operation Package 1."
This appendix describes the general procedure for adding a
language environment.
For an explanation of the specific
procedure for adding a Japanese, German, French, Italian, or
Spanish environment, see Section 1.2, "Installing Basic
Operation Package 1."
• Manually adding a language environment
1. Create the message files and INI files for the desired language.
2. Create subfolders for storing the message files and INI files within
the folder of the Basic Operation Package.
3. Copy the message files and INI files into the subfolders created in
step 2, above.
4. Display the [Language Switcher Setting] screen. (For details of this
operation, see Section 11.4.1, "Installing message languages.")
-431-
APPENDIX 4 SWITCHING THE MESSAGE LANGUAGE
B-62994EN/02
5. Click the <New...> button, then enter the language name.
6. Specify the names of the subfolders created in step 2, above, for
"Message files sub dir." and "INI files sub dir."
To place the
message files in the C:\BOP\MESSAGE folder, which is in the
C:\BOP folder of the Basic Operation Package, for example, specify
MESSAGE.
7. Click the <OK> button.
• Using the installer to add a language environment
The manual procedure described above can be simplified by using the
installer (ADDLANG.EXE).
1. Create the message files and INI files for the desired language.
2. Copy ADDLANG.EXE and its setting file SETUP.LST. When using
the WIN16 version, copy the contents of the \JPN\ folder on the disk
(A02B-0207-K750#ZZ07-9). When using the WIN32 version, copy
the contents of the \JPN\ folder on the disk (A02B-0207-K750#ZZ075).
3. Edit SETUP.LST as described below.
- Substitute the character strings of the [Message] section.
This section contains the following items:
[Message]
"key" = "character-string"
Substitute only the "character-string" part, leaving the "key" part
as is.
- Edit the [Setup] section.
The list below indicates the contents of the [Setup] section.
Item
Description

Name
Specifies a language name.
MsgDir
Specifies the subfolder into which message files are
copied.
IniDir
Specifies the subfolder into which the INI files are
copied.
Specify the subfolder as follows:
To place the message files in the C:\BOP\MESSAGE folder
included in Basic Operation Package folder C:\BOP, specify
MESSAGE.
- Edit the [Files] section.
In the [Files] section, specify the files to be added, in the
following format:
-432-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 4 SWITCHING THE MESSAGE LANGUAGE
Filex=filename
Each file specification line must begin with the keyword File. As
the argument x, specify a number. From the beginning of this
section, specify the numbers in ascending order, starting from 1.
Numbers cannot be skipped.
(Example) [Files]
File1=msg_bop.msg
File2=msg_menu.msg
File3=param16m.ini
The file name extension indicates the destination folder to which
the file is added.
Extension
Destination folder

MSG
Message file folder specified in the [Setup] section
INI
INI file folder specified in the [Setup] section
DLL
Windows system folder
4. Copy ADDLANG.EXE, SETUP.LST, and other files to be added
into the same folder on the same disk.
When ADDLANG.EXE is executed, the files of the desired language are
installed.
lReferencing a message file when customizing the screen
A message ID in a message file can be input using the dialog box of the
screen customize function. Input the message ID in the following format,
in the text box displayed for character string specification.
#[decimal]
(Example: #1234)
When the input value is smaller than 10000, the corresponding message ID
is referenced in the ID MSG_MENU group (MSG_MENU.MSG file).
When the input value is greater than or equal to 10000, the message ID of
the input number minus 10000 is referenced in the ID MSG_USER group
(MSG_USER.MSG file).
NOTE
l FANUC does not provide message file MSG_USER.MSG of
group ID MSG_USER.
l No message ID can be input for the character string of the
following items:
- Screen object ID
- OLE ProgID
-433-
APPENDIX 5 MESSAGE FILE GENERATOR
APPENDIX
5
B-62994EN/02
MESSAGE FILE GENERATOR
This section describes how to create a message file.
Basic Operation Package 1 manages the messages to be displayed in a binary
file. The messages are stored in message files. These message files are
usually stored in the Message folder included in the folder in which the Basic
Operation Package is installed.
With Basic Operation Package 1, the user can change the message to be
displayed by replacing the message files. This section describes how to
create a message file using the message file generator (MSGGEN.EXE in the
WIN16 version or MSGGEN32.EXE in the WIN32 version).
For an
explanation of how to change the message to be displayed, see Appendix 4,
"Switching the Message Language."
lFiles related to the message file generator
The MSG folder on the disk (A02B-0207-K750#ZZ07-10) contains the
following files that are required by the message generator.
MSGPRM.DAT:
Sample message generator parameter file. This text
file contains the correspondence between languages,
paths, group IDs, and file names. The file format is
described below under "File Format."
*.TXT
:
Message text file. This text file contains message IDs
and messages (in different languages). The file format
is described below under "File Format."
MSGGEN.EXE :
Message generator.
This program automatically
creates a message file and message ID header file from
the message generator parameter file and message text
file.
-434-
APPENDIX 5 MESSAGE FILE GENERATOR
B-62994EN/02
lFile format
The message generator parameter file and message text file have the
following formats:
Message generator parameter file (MSGPRM.DAT)
In this text file, the correspondence between languages, paths, group IDs,
and file names is specified. The data in this file has the following format:
#LANG !Language name & path (max 20 group)
eng c:\bop\msg\eng
!english
jpn c:\bop\msg\jpn
!japanese
ger c:\bop\msg\ger
!german
fre c:\bop\msg\fre
!french
ita c:\bop\msg\ita
!italian
spa c:\bop\msg\spa
!spanish
swd c:\bop\msg\swd
!swedish
•
#END
#TEXT_PATH
‚
c:\bop\msg\txt
#END
#HEADER_PATH
ƒ
c:\bop\msg\include
#END
#GID !Group-ID name : message file name
MSG_GID_POS
msg_pos
MSG_GID_PRG
msg_prg
MSG_GID_OFS
msg_ofs
MSG_GID_PCHK
msg_pchk
„
#END
Explanation
• Message file path
A language name and the path of the message file of the language are
specified. The full path name must be specified. Different paths must
be specified for different languages. The language name is used as a
language ID in the message file. When adding a new language, specify
the language name and path here.
‚ Message text file path
The path of the message text files is specified. The full path name must
be specified.
-435-
APPENDIX 5 MESSAGE FILE GENERATOR
B-62994EN/02
ƒ Message ID header file path
The path of the message ID header files is specified. The full path
name must be specified.
„ Group ID and message text file name
A group ID and the corresponding message text file name (without the
path and extension) are specified.
changed.
Usually, this part need not be
When adding a new screen, for example, add the
corresponding group ID and message text file name here.
NOTE
The path specified in the message generator parameter file must
be created in advance. If the specified path cannot be found, the
following error occurs when the message generator is executed:
Error No2: Can't open file_name
Note the following restrictions:
• A character string following an exclamation mark (!) is assumed to be
a comment.
• Any intervening blanks or tabs are ignored.
• Each language name must be specified using three characters. Up to
20 languages can be entered.
• Each path name can be specified using up to 256 characters.
• Each group ID can be specified using up to 16 characters.
• Each message text file name can be specified using up to eight
characters.
• Any number of groups can be specified.
Message text file (The extension is always .txt.)
In this text file, message IDs and messages (in different languages) are
specified. The data in this file is of the following format:
! POSITION SCREEN
ID:
MSG_POS_ALL
•
ENG "ACTUAL POSITION"
JPN: "
"
GER: "IST-POSITION"
FRE: "POSITION REELL"
ITA:
"VELOC POSIZION"
SPA: "POSICION REAL"
SWD: "VERKL.POSITION" !comment
-436-
‚
APPENDIX 5 MESSAGE FILE GENERATOR
B-62994EN/02
ID:
MSG_SAMPLE
ENG: "111" , “222” “333\””
ƒ
,”SECOND LINE ”
“THIRD LINE\”” ,” END”
JPN:
...
...
• Message ID
Unique name assigned to each message. The message ID must be
specified using up to 16 characters.
‚ Language ID and messages in different languages
The language IDs specified in the message generator parameter file and
the messages written in the corresponding languages are specified.
Note the following restrictions:
• A character string following an exclamation mark (!), except for any
within a character string, is assumed to be a comment.
• An intervening blank or tab, except for any within a character string, is
ignored.
• A single character string must be enclosed by a pair of double
quotation marks.
• A single character string enclosed by a pair of double quotation marks
can be coded over multiple lines. Two or more character strings can
be coded on a single line. For example, the message in ƒ, above, is
displayed as follows:
111222333"SECOND LINE THIRD LINE" END
• The length of a single message is not limited. Each line can be up to
512 characters long.
• A double quotation mark (") is coded as \", \ as \\, a line feed character
as \n, and a tab character as \t.
"AB\"CD\"EF"
→
AB"CD"EF
"\\10.000"
→
\10.000
• The messages for all the languages specified in the parameter file must
be included.
Message file (The extension is always .msg.)
This file is automatically created by the message generator. The file
name is the same as that of the message text file, but with the extension
changed to .msg. The message files of different languages are identified
by their paths alone.
-437-
APPENDIX 5 MESSAGE FILE GENERATOR
B-62994EN/02
Message ID header file (The extension is always .h.)
This file is automatically created by the message generator. The file
name is the same as that of the message text file, but with the extension
changed to .h. This file contains group IDs and message IDs.
The data in this file is of the following format:
// Group ID definition
#define MSG_GID_POS "msg_pos"
// Message ID definition
#define MSG_POS_ALL 0
#define MSG_POS_ALL2 1
...
lCreating a message file
To create a message file, follow the procedure given below:
1. Create a parameter file (MSGPRM.DAT).
The MSG folder on the disk (A02B-0207-K750#ZZ07-10)
contains the parameter file that is used to develop Basic
Operation Package 1.
2. Create a message text file (MSG_POS.TXT, for example).
The MSG folder on the disk (A02B-0207-K750#ZZ07-10)
contains the message text file that is used to develop Basic
Operation Package 1.
3. Execute the message generator (MSGGEN.EXE in the WIN16
version or MSGGEN32.EXE in the WIN32 version), and create
message ID header files (MSG_POS.H, for example) and message
files of different languages (MSG_POS.MSG, for example). When
executing the message generator, use the following format:
WIN16 version
msggen prm_file_name group_ID
WIN32 version
msggen32 prm_file_name group_ID
prm_file_name :
Parameter file name (full path name)
group_ID
ID of the group to be created (When all is
:
specified, all groups are generated.)
-438-
B-62994EN/02
APPENDIX 5 MESSAGE FILE GENERATOR
The message files of all languages and message ID header files are
created for the group specified as group_ID. group_ID must be
specified in the parameter file. When all is specified, the files for all
specified groups are created.
Example with the WIN16 package)
msggen msgprm.dat MSG_GID_POS → Creates the messages to
be
displayed
on
the
position screen.
msggen msgprm.dat all
→ Creates all messages.
When the message generator terminates, one of the following messages
is displayed to show the result of the execution.
Error No.0: Normal end.
The message generator has terminated normally.
Error No.1: Internal error in file_name line ####
An internal error occurred.
Error No.2: Can't open file_name
The file cannot be opened.
Error No.3: Illegal parameter file format in file_name line ####
The parameter file is of an illegal format.
Error No.4: Too many languages in file_name line ####
The number of languages has exceeded 20.
Error No.5: Too short/long language name in file_name line ####
A language name consists of other than three
characters.
Error No.6: Too long group-ID name (max 16 char) in file_name
line ####
A group ID is longer than 16 characters.
Error No.7: Too long file name in file_name line ####
A file name is longer than eight characters.
Error No.8: Too long path name in file_name line ####
A path name is longer than 80 characters.
Error No.9: Not found group-ID
The specified group ID is not found in the parameter
file.
Error No.10: Illegal message in file_name line ####
An illegal message has been found.
(An unpaired
double quotation mark is used, for example.)
Error No.11: Illegal text file format in file_name line ####
The format of the message text file is illegal.
-439-
APPENDIX 5 MESSAGE FILE GENERATOR
B-62994EN/02
Error No.12: Lack of language in file_name line ####
A message of a language is missing. (The messages of
all languages specified in the parameter file must be
included.)
Error No.13: Double message definition in file_name line ####
Two or more messages are defined in a single
language for a single message.
Error No.14: Too long message-ID name (max 16 char) in
file_name line ####
A message ID is longer than 16 characters.
NOTE
Double definition of an ID (group ID, message ID) is not
checked and will not cause any error.
-440-
INDEX
B-62994EN/02
Number
2-Path Interference Check Settings
192
A
Adding a tool to a tool group included in the tool
life management data
151
B
BACKING UP THE SETTING FILE
9
B-Axis Tool Offset Settings
186
C
Canceling the amount of handle interruption
47
Changing a NC program comment
97
Changing settings of screen objects
355
Changing the life status of a tool included in the
tool life management data (for lathe systems)
157
84
CREATING AN ActiveX CONTROL
420
Creating custom screen objects
349
Creating custom screens
334
Custom Macro Variable Settings
132
CUSTOM
313
CUSTOMIZATION
322
Customizing Alarm Messages
364
Customizing General Settings for Basic Operation
Package 1
323
419
BASIC KNOWLEDGE
Copying character strings from an MDI program
Customizing Message Languages
358
Customizing Screen Objects
347
Customizing Screens
333
Cutting character strings from a NC program
64
Cutting character strings from an MDI program
82
D
Data Input/Output
203
Deleting a NC program
94
Deleting a tool from a tool group included in the
tool life management data (for lathe systems)
165
163
Changing the life status of a tool included
in the tool life management data
(for machining center systems)
154
Changing the NC program directory contents
98
Changing the order in which message languages
are listed
362
Deleting a tool from a tool group included
in the tool life management data
(for machining center systems)
Changing the order in which screens appear
341
Deleting and initializing all PMC data
278
Checking the Program Currently Being Executed
100
Deleting data files
229
Chopping Data Settings
180
Deleting screen objects
356
Chuck and Tailstock Barrier Settings
182
Deleting screens
342
Clearing all custom macro variables
140
Deleting the entire alarm message history
290
Clearing all tool offset data
130
Deleting tools for machining-in-progress drawing
297
Clearing the operation history information
282
Displaying Alarm Messages
287
Collecting Waveform Diagnosis Data
243
Displaying lists of various data files
208
Collecting waveform diagnosis sampling data
250
Displaying local variables
134
Common variable 1 settings
136, 175
Displaying local variables
174
Common variable 2 settings
137, 176
Displaying Operator Messages
288
Copying a NC program
92
Displaying the Absolute Position
42
Copying character strings from a NC program
66
Displaying the Alarm Message History
289
i-1
INDEX
Displaying the Amount of Handle Interruption
46
Displaying the B-Axis Operating Status
114
Displaying the Current and Next Blocks of
the NC Program Being Executed
105
Displaying the Diagnosis Screen
198
Displaying the Distance to Go
45
Displaying the end of a NC program
74
Displaying the end of an MDI program
89
Displaying the Machine Position
44
Displaying the Machining Time and Machined
Parts Count
B-62994EN/02
Finding a character string in an MDI program
79
G
Getting a program from the NC
56
I
Inserting a NC program from a disk
59
Inserting sequence numbers into a NC program
68
Inserting sequence numbers into an MDI program
86
50
Installing Basic Operation Package 1
4
Displaying the Machining Times
112
Installing message languages
Displaying the NC Program Directory
90
Integrating DNC Operation Management Package 367
Displaying the OLE Object Screen
314
Displaying the Operating Monitor
49
Displaying the Operation History
280
MESSAGE FILE GENERATOR
434
Displaying the PMC Alarm Screen
262
MESSAGES
286
Displaying the PMC Status Screen
260
MILLING ANIMATION FUNCTION (OPTION) 292
Displaying the Relative Position
33
Displaying the System Configuration
200
Modifying tool data for machining-in-progress
drawing
Displaying the top of a NC program
73
Displaying the top of an MDI program
88
Displaying Version Information
25
Displaying Waveform Diagnosis Graphs
252
359
M
296
N
NC PROGRAM
52
O
E
Operating Environment
2
Editing a NC Program
53
Operating Time, Parts Count, and Timer Settings
121
Editing an MDI Program
77
Outputting different types of data
220
Entering a coordinate value into a NC program
71
Outputting the system configuration data to a file
201
Entering a measured value as the tool offset data
129
Overall Position Display
31
Entering a measured value as workpiece origin
offset data
145
Entering a relative coordinate value as a macro
variable
139
Entering a relative coordinate value as
the tool offset data
P
Pasting character strings into a NC program
67
Pasting character strings into an MDI program
85
127
P-Code Macro Variable Settings
172
Entering different types of data
210
P-code variable 1 settings
177
Example for inserting an OLE object
316
P-code variable 2 settings
178
Performing Machining-in-Progress Drawing
302
POSITION DISPLAY
30
Positioning a window
22
F
Finding a character string in a NC program
61
i-2
INDEX
B-62994EN/02
Presetting relative coordinates
36
Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data
233
Presetting the workpiece coordinate system
39
Setting PMC Data
269
Setting screen colors
330
Setting Servo Setting Data
235
Setting Servo Tuning Data
237
Setting soft keys as empty
345
Setting soft keys
327
Setting Spindle Setting Data
239
Setting Spindle Tuning Data
241
R
Reading tool data for machining-in-progress
drawing from a file
300
Registering tools for machining-in-progress
drawing
294
Renaming different types of data files
231
Replacing a character string in a NC program
62
Replacing a character string in an MDI program
80
REQUIRED NC SETTING FOR EACH BASIC
OPERATION PACKAGE 1 SCREEN
371
Resetting relative coordinates
35
Restarting a NC Program
106
Rewinding the tape to the beginning of
the NC program
101
Setting the axis order of movement to the program
restart position
108
S
Setting the CNC Parameters
27
Setting the data table of PMC data
271
Setting the group data of PMC data
273
Setting the life counter data included in the tool
life management data (for lathe systems)
161
Setting the life counter data included in
the tool life management data
(for machining center systems)
159
Setting the machine position to the floating
reference position
38
SETTING THE PARAMETERS REQUIRED TO
USE BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 1
26
Setting the path number output option
332
Setting the PMC Counter
263
Setting the PMC Keep Relay
267
Setting the PMC Timer
265
Saving tool data for machining-in-progress
drawing into a file
299
Saving waveform diagnosis data into a file
259
Searching for a sequence number
103
Searching for a sequence/block number
109
Selecting a NC program to be executed
95
Selecting a Path
24
Selecting a window
21
Selecting and Positioning Windows
21
Selecting character strings in a NC program
63
Selecting character strings in an MDI program
81
Selecting the waveform diagnosis data to be
displayed
257
Showing or hiding chapters
343
Setting a blank in a macro variable
142
Software Operator's Panel Settings
167
Setting a blank in a P-code macro variable
179
Specifying a Node
29
Setting data for waveform diagnosis
245
Stamping the machining time
75
Setting Data
117
Setting general options for Basic Operation
Package 1
Starting and Terminating Basic Operation
Package 1
10
325
Starting Basic Operation Package 1
10
Setting I/O signals for the operation history
284
Starting machining-in-progress drawing
310
Setting parameters for input/output
204
Switching the message language
360
Setting Parameters
196
SWITCHING THE MESSAGE LANGUAGE
430
Setting Tools for Machining-in-Progress Drawing 293
SETTING
116
Settings for machining-in-progress drawing
303
SETUP
i-3
1
INDEX
SYSTEM
B-62994EN/02
Uninstalling Basic Operation Package 1
195
Uninstalling message languages
7
363
T
Terminating Basic Operation Package 1
11
W
Tool Life Management Data Settings
147
Window Names and Functions
13
Tool Offset Settings
124
Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Settings
169
Tool Post Interference Check Settings
189
Workpiece Origin Offset Settings
143
Writing a NC program back to the NC
58
Writing a NC program to a disk
60
U
i-4
Revision Record
FANUC OPEN CNC Basic Operation Package 1 (For Windows 95/AT) (B-62994EN)
• Addition of Power Mate
02
Feb., '99 • Addition of Requied NC setting for each screen
01
Dec., '97
Edition
Date
Contents
Edition
Date
Contents